Caesar Ii

September 2007
Dear CAESAR II User,
Enclosed please find Version 5.10 of the CAESAR II Pipe Stress Analysis program. This package
includes a program CD-Rom and associated documentation.
This version of CAESAR II incorporates many new features and technical capabilities. Some of the more
significant changes are listed in the table below (for a complete list of changes, refer to Chapter 1 of the
User’s Manual).
• Added flange rating evaluation per B16.5 and NC-3658.
• Revised due to “code” changes the following piping codes: B31.1, B31.3, B31.4, Z662,
EN-13480
• Revised Wind and Seismic load calculations to ASCE #7 2005.
• Added many graphics improvements.
The CD-ROM has an Auto-Run feature that should start the installation driver as soon as the CD tray is
closed. The installation of Version 5.10 will create a group on the startup menu for subsequent access.
Additionally a desktop shortcut icon to C2.EXE will be placed on the desktop. Please refer to Chapter 2
of the User’s Manual for additional details, and the “silent install” option.
Please be aware that Version 5.10 is not downward compatible with any previous version of the software.
Input files from older versions are upward compatible as always.
Version 5.10 (like all previous versions) of CAESAR II has been tested according to the QA standards
established at COADE. Jobs created on earlier versions are compatible with Version 5.10 and should
yield the same results as earlier versions (except as noted in the Technical Changes on the next page).
Regards,
CAESAR II Development Staff

CAESAR II Version 5.10 Changes
This list details the new or changed capabilities and features of CAESAR II Version 5.10.
• Added flange rating evaluation per B16.5 and NC-3658.
• Graphics Improvements:
o Improved graphics rendering speed proved by 20% to 50% depending on the job.
o Added additional controls to view corrosion and densities.
o Added the ability to import an Autocad (CADWorx) model directly into the piping input, to
provide visualization of supporting steel, vessels and other equipment.
• Static Output Processor Improvements:
o Reduced report generation times by 70% or better

o Added Presentation in “tabbed” window to allow viewing multiple reports, and immediate
switching between reports.
o Added ability to select Individual items from “Miscellaneous Report”
o Added ability to zoom Reports and individually direct to an output device via a “context
menu”
o Added Custom report templates can be imported and exported.
• Static Load Case Editor enhancements
o Added In-Line Flange Evaluation at the load case level.

o Added the ability to alter the “occasional load multiplier” on a “per load case basis”.
o Added the ability to “import” static load data from different jobs
o Added the ability to copy wind and wave vectors.
• Added user control over whether or not insulation should be considered in hydro test cases.
• Added the following new piping codes: PD-8010 Part 1 and Part 2.
• Revised the following piping codes due to “code” changes: B31.1, B31.3, B31.4, Z662,
EN-13480
• Added support for B31.3 Section 319.2.3(c), allowing axial stress to be included in the Expansion
Code Stress.
th
• Revised API-661 to 6 Edition.
• Revised Wind and Seismic load calculations to ASCE #7 2005.
• Added a number of European materials to the material database.
• Updated stainless steel pipe specification data per B36.19M.
• Updated DIN pipe size specification to comply with EN-10220 (seamless) instead of DIN-2458
(welded).
• Added Chinese structural steel and expansion joint databases.
• Added spring hanger data from Gradior Power, (Czech Republic).
• Updated the flange material database per ASME Sect VIII Div 1, 2007 Edition.
• Updated the Inoflex Spring Hanger data.

CAESAR II Version 5.10 - Technical Changes
The following list details changes to CAESAR II for Version 5.10, which may affect the numeric results.
• Corrected the system weight distribution in the “restrained weight” case when hanger
operating loads are defined by the user), (060301 build).
• Modified the SIF calculations for ASME NC/ND (July 2005 addendum), (060301 build).
• Corrected the determination of the governing "code stress" for combination load cases for
Offshore, Z662, and BS-7159 codes.
• Corrected the auto-computation of the “B31.3 Wc” value for bends, (070122 build).
• For EN-13480:
o Corrected the use of sweepolets, weldolets, and extruded tees so that they use the same
SIF computations as Unreinforced tees.
o Changed the “default occasional load factor” from 1.33 to 1.00.
o Corrected the computation of the allowable stress for the EN-13480 (060426 build) and
CODETI (060707 build) codes Expansion case.
o Corrected the usage of the “effective section modulus” for reducing tees for both CODETI
and EN-13480.
• For CODETI:
o The code now enforces corrosion allowance, if specified.
• Modified the usage of the hanger stiffness values when using the “as designed“ option for hanger
design, (060426 build).
• Updated ASCE #7 wind load generation to 2005 Edition:
o Updated Table 6-1 for Importance Factor

o Updated Table 6-2 for Exposure Constants zg and alpha
o Updated the equation for Kz.
o Updated limiting conditions for the determination of Kzt.
o Updated the computation of the “gust factor”.
• B31.1 A2005 introduced a number of changes that will affect existing jobs. These changes are:
o If the program is allowed to update the allowable stresses, higher values will be acquired.
o The Sc and Sh values used to determine the Expansion allowable are now limited to 20
ksi.
o In Table 102.1.2.a, “note a” changes the “y” value from 0.4 to 0.0. This will only affect the
“minimum wall thickness” calculation.
o Corrections have been made to the butt weld and branch connection restrictions
o The addendum exchanged the equations (between the figure and the notes) used to
compute the "flexibility characteristic" for welding tees and welded-in contour inserts
(sweepolets). This change will cause the SIFs for these fittings to change accordingly.
CAESAR II defaults to the updated equation in the figure, which is more conservative.
Users can control this choice with a new configuration option. B31.1 and B31.3 now
match in this regard.
Version 5.10 CAESAR II User Guide
Copyright © 1985-2008 COADE, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Printed on 18 September, 2007

2
Preface
CAESAR II LICENSE AGREEMENT
Licensor: COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc., 12777 Jones Road., Suite. 480, Houston, Texas 77070
ACCEPTANCE OF TERMS OF AGREEMENT BY THE USER

YOU SHOULD CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE USING THIS
PACKAGE. USING THIS PACKAGE INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS.
The enclosed proprietary encoded materials, hereinafter referred to as the Licensed Program(s), are the property of COADE
and are provided to you under the terms and conditions of this License Agreement. You assume responsibility for the
selection of the appropriate Licensed Program(s) to achieve the intended results, and for the installation, use and results
obtained from the selected Licensed Program(s).
LICENSE GRANT
In return for the payment of the license fee associated with the acquisition of the Licensed Program(s) from COADE,
COADE hereby grants you the following non-exclusive rights with regard to the Licensed Program(s):
a Use of the License Program(s) on one machine. Under no circumstance is the License Program to be executed without a
COADE External Software Lock (ESL).
b To transfer the Licensed Program(s) and license it to a third party if the third party acknowledges in writing its
agreement to accept the Licensed Program(s) under the terms and conditions of this License Agreement; if you
transfer the Licensed Program(s), you must at the same time either transfer all copies whether printed or in
machine-readable form to the same party or destroy any copies not so transferred; the requirement to transfer and/or
destroy copies of the Licensed Program(s) also pertains to any and all modifications and portions of Licensed
Program(s) contained or merged into other programs.
You agree to reproduce and include the copyright notice as it appears on the Licensed Program(s) on any copy, modification
or merged portion of the Licensed Program(s).
THIS LICENSE DOES NOT GIVE YOU ANY RIGHT TO USE COPY, MODIFY, OR TRANSFER THE LICENSED
PROGRAM(S) OR ANY COPY, MODIFICATION OR MERGED PORTION THEREOF, IN WHOLE OR IN PART,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. IF YOU TRANSFER POSSESSION OF
ANY COPY, MODIFICATION OR MERGED PORTION OF THE LICENSED PROGRAM(S) TO ANOTHER PARTY,
THE LICENSE GRANTED HEREUNDER TO YOU IS AUTOMATICALLY TERMINATED.
TERM
This License Agreement is effective upon acceptance and use of the Licensed Program(s) until terminated in accordance
with the terms of this License Agreement. You may terminate the License Agreement at any time by destroying the
Licensed Program(s) together with all copies, modifications, and merged portions thereof in any form. This License
Agreement will also terminate upon conditions set forth elsewhere in this Agreement or automatically in the event you fail
to comply with any term or condition of this License Agreement. You hereby agree upon such termination to destroy the
Licensed Program(s) together with all copies, modifications, and merged portions thereof in any form.
LIMITED WARRANTY
The Licensed Program(s), i.e. the tangible proprietary software, is provided “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND EXPLICITLY EXCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. The entire risk as to the quality and performance
of the Licensed Program(s) is with you.
3
Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of limited warranties, and, in those jurisdictions the above exclusions may not
apply. This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from one
jurisdiction to another.
COADE does not warrant that the functions contained in the Licensed Program(s) will meet your requirements or that the
operation of the program will be uninterrupted or error free.
COADE does warrant, however, that the CD(s), i.e. the tangible physical medium on which the Licensed Program(s) is
furnished, to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of ninety (90) days from the
date of delivery to you as evidenced by a copy of your receipt.
COADE warrants that any program errors will be fixed by COADE, at COADE’s expense, as soon as possible after the
problem is reported and verified. However, only those customers current on their update/maintenance contracts are eligible
to receive the corrected version of the program.
ENTIRE AGREEMENT
This written Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties concerning the Licensed Program(s). No agent,
distributor, salesman or other person acting or representing themselves to act on behalf of COADE has the authority to
modify or supplement the limited warranty contained herein, nor any of the other specific provisions of this Agreement, and
no such modifications or supplements shall be effective unless agreed to in writing by an officer of COADE having
authority to act on behalf of COADE in this regard.
LIMITATIONS OF REMEDIES
COADE’s entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be:
a The replacement of any CD not meeting COADE’s “Limited Warranty” as defined herein and which is returned to
COADE or an authorized COADE dealer with a copy of your receipt, or
b If COADE or the dealer is unable to deliver a replacement CD which is free of defects in materials or workmanship you
may terminate this License Agreement by returning the Licensed Program(s) and associated documentation and you
will be refunded all monies paid to COADE to acquire the Licensed Program(s).
IN NO EVENT WILL COADE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS,
LOST SAVINGS, AND OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR
INABILITY TO USE THE LICENSED PROGRAM(S) EVEN IF COADE OR AN AUTHORIZED COADE DEALER
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER
PARTY.
SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT PERMIT LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL AND
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THAT THE ABOVE LIMITATION AND EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY IN
THOSE JURISDICTIONS. FURTHERMORE, COADE DOES NOT PURPORT TO DISCLAIM ANY LIABILITY FOR
PERSONAL INJURY CAUSED BY DEFECTS IN THE CDS OR OTHER PRODUCTS PROVIDED BY COADE
PURSUANT TO THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
GENERAL
You may not sublicense, assign, or transfer your rights under this License Agreement or the Licensed Program(s) except as
expressly provided in this License Agreement. Any attempt otherwise to sublicense, assign or transfer any of the rights,
duties or obligations hereunder is void and constitutes a breach of this License Agreement giving COADE the right to
terminate as specified herein. This Agreement is governed by the laws of the State of Texas, United States of America.
The initial license fee includes 1 year of support, maintenance and enhancements to the program. After the first 1 year term,
such updates and support are optional at the then current update fee.
4
Questions concerning this License Agreement, and all notices required herein, shall be made by contacting COADE in
writing at COADE, 12777 Jones Road, Suite 480, Houston, Texas, 77070, or by telephone, 281-890-4566.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS
You acknowledge the Software is subject to U.S. export jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all applicable international
and national laws that apply to the Software, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user,
end-use, and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. For additional information see
http://www.bis.doc.gov (http://www.bis.doc.gov/ \o http://www.bis.doc.gov/).”
DISCLAIMER - CAESAR II
Copyright (c) COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc., 2008, all rights reserved.
This proprietary software is the property of COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc. and is provided to the user pursuant
to a COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc. program license agreement containing restrictions on its use. It may not be
copied or distributed in any form or medium, disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner accept as expressly permitted
by the COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc. program license agreement.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED. COADE/ENGINEERING PHYSICS SOFTWARE, INC. SHALL NOT HAVE ANY LIABILITY TO THE
USER IN EXCESS OF THE TOTAL AMOUNT PAID TO COADE UNDER THE COADE/ENGINEERING PHYSICS
SOFTWARE, INC. LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR THIS SOFTWARE. IN NO EVENT WILL COADE/ENGINEERING
PHYSICS SOFTWARE, INC. BE LIABLE TO THE USER FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF
COADE/ENGINEERING PHYSICS, INC. HAS BEEN ADVISED AS TO THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IT
IS THE USERS RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY THE RESULTS OF THE PROGRAM.
HOOPS‘ License Grant

COADE grants to CAESAR II Users a non-exclusive license to use the Software Application under the terms stated in this
Agreement.
CAESAR II Users agree not to alter, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Software Application. CAESAR II Users will not
copy the Software except: (i) as necessary to install the Software Application onto a computer(s)... or (ii) to create an
archival copy. CAESAR II Users agree that any such copies of the Software Application shall contain the same proprietary
notices which appear on and in the Software Application.
Title to and ownership of the intellectual property rights associated with the Software Application and any copies remain
with COADE and its suppliers.
CAESAR II Users are hereby notified that Tech Soft 3D, L.L.C 931 Ashby Ave., Berkeley, CA 94710 ("Tech Soft 3D") is
a third-party beneficiary to this Agreement to the extent that this Agreement contains provisions which relate to CAESAR II
Users’ use of the Software Application. Such provisions are made expressly for the benefit of Tech Soft 3D and are
enforceable by Tech Soft 3D in addition to COADE.
In no event shall COADE or its suppliers be liable in any way for indirect, special, or consequential damages of any nature,
including without limitation, lost business profits, or liability or injury to third persons, whether foreseeable or not,
regardless of whether COADE or its suppliers have been advised of the possibility of such damages.
Contents
Preface ..........................................................................................................................................................2
CAESAR II LICENSE AGREEMENT.............................................................................................2
ACCEPTANCE OF TERMS OF AGREEMENT BY THE USER...................................................2
LICENSE GRANT ............................................................................................................................2
TERM................................................................................................................................................2
LIMITED WARRANTY...................................................................................................................2
ENTIRE AGREEMENT ...................................................................................................................3
LIMITATIONS OF REMEDIES ......................................................................................................3
GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................3
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS ..............................................................................................................4
DISCLAIMER - CAESAR II ............................................................................................................4
HOOPS‘ License Grant .....................................................................................................................4
Chapter 1 Introduction 1-1

What is CAESAR II?................................................................................................................................ 1-2
What are the Applications of CAESAR II? .............................................................................................. 1-3
What Distinguishes CAESAR II From Other Pipe Stress Packages? ....................................................... 1-4
About the CAESAR II Documentation..................................................................................................... 1-5
Program Support/User Assistance ............................................................................................................ 1-6
Software Revision Procedures .................................................................................................................. 1-7
Identifying Builds .......................................................................................................................... 1-7
Can Builds Be Applied To Any Version? ..................................................................................... 1-7
Announcing Builds ........................................................................................................................ 1-7
Obtaining Builds............................................................................................................................ 1-7
What is Contained In A Specific Build?........................................................................................ 1-7
Installing Builds............................................................................................................................. 1-7
Detecting/Checking Builds............................................................................................................ 1-8
Archiving and Reinstalling an Old, Patched Version .................................................................... 1-8
Updates and License Types ...................................................................................................................... 1-9
Full Run ......................................................................................................................................... 1-9
Lease.............................................................................................................................................. 1-9
Limited Run................................................................................................................................... 1-9
Program Changes.................................................................................................................................... 1-10
Technical Changes.................................................................................................................................. 1-12
Chapter 2 Installation 2-1

Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 2-2
System and Hardware Requirements ........................................................................................................ 2-3
Installing CAESAR II Overview .............................................................................................................. 2-4
Installation ..................................................................................................................................... 2-5
Installing CAESAR II in Silent Mode ......................................................................................... 2-13
ESL Installation on a Network................................................................................................................ 2-15
Novell File Server ESL Installation............................................................................................. 2-15
Novell Workstation ESL Installation........................................................................................... 2-15
Windows Server Installation ....................................................................................................... 2-15
2 Contents
Notes on Network ESLs ......................................................................................................................... 2-16
Chapter 3 Quick Start and Basic Operation 3-1

CAESAR II Quick Start............................................................................................................................ 3-2
Starting CAESAR II ...................................................................................................................... 3-2
Basic Operation ........................................................................................................................................ 3-5
Piping Input Generation................................................................................................................. 3-5
Error Checking the Model ............................................................................................................. 3-9
Building the Load Cases.............................................................................................................. 3-11
Executing Static Analysis ............................................................................................................ 3-12
Static Output Review................................................................................................................... 3-13
Chapter 4 Main Menu 4-1

The CAESAR II Main Menu .................................................................................................................... 4-2
File Menu.................................................................................................................................................. 4-3
Input Menu................................................................................................................................................ 4-5
Analysis Menu .......................................................................................................................................... 4-6
Output Menu............................................................................................................................................. 4-7
Tools Menu............................................................................................................................................... 4-8
Diagnostics Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 4-9
ESL Menu............................................................................................................................................... 4-10
View Menu ............................................................................................................................................. 4-11
Help Menu .............................................................................................................................................. 4-12
Chapter 5 Piping Input 5-1

Spreadsheet Overview .............................................................................................................................. 5-2
Customize Toolbar ........................................................................................................................ 5-3
Data Fields ................................................................................................................................................ 5-4
Node Numbers............................................................................................................................... 5-4
Element Lengths ............................................................................................................................ 5-4
Element Direction Cosines ............................................................................................................ 5-5
Pipe Section Properties.................................................................................................................. 5-5
Operating Conditions: Temperatures and Pressures ...................................................................... 5-6
Special Element Information ......................................................................................................... 5-6
Boundary Conditions..................................................................................................................... 5-7
Loading Conditions ....................................................................................................................... 5-7
Piping Material .............................................................................................................................. 5-8
Material Elastic Properties............................................................................................................. 5-8
Densities ........................................................................................................................................ 5-8
Auxiliary Data Area.................................................................................................................................. 5-9
Flanges........................................................................................................................................... 5-9
Bend Data .................................................................................................................................... 5-10
Rigid Weight ............................................................................................................................... 5-11
Restraints ..................................................................................................................................... 5-12
Expansion Joint ........................................................................................................................... 5-13
Displacements.............................................................................................................................. 5-14
Forces .......................................................................................................................................... 5-15
Uniform Loads............................................................................................................................. 5-16
Wind/Wave.................................................................................................................................. 5-17
Allowable Stresses....................................................................................................................... 5-18
Stress Intensification Factors/Tees .............................................................................................. 5-19
Flexible Nozzles .......................................................................................................................... 5-20
Contents 3
Hangers........................................................................................................................................ 5-21
Node Names ................................................................................................................................ 5-22
Offsets ......................................................................................................................................... 5-23
Menu Commands.................................................................................................................................... 5-24
File Menu .................................................................................................................................... 5-24
Edit Menu .................................................................................................................................... 5-26
Model Menu ................................................................................................................................ 5-31
Break ........................................................................................................................................... 5-31
Environment Menu ...................................................................................................................... 5-36
3-D Modeler............................................................................................................................................ 5-39
3D Graphics Configuration ......................................................................................................... 5-43
User Options................................................................................................................................ 5-46
HOOPS Toolbar Manipulations .................................................................................................. 5-49
3D Graphic Highlights - Materials, Diameters, Wall Thickness, Insulation ............................... 5-50
3D Graphics Highlights: Temperature and Pressure ................................................................... 5-51
3D Graphics Highlights: Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, Wind/Wave Loads............... 5-52
Limiting the Amount of Displayed Info; Find Node, Range & Cutting Plane ............................ 5-53
Save an Image for Later Presentation: TIF, HTML, BMP, JPEG and PDF ................................ 5-54
3D Graphics Interactive Feature: Walk Through......................................................................... 5-56
Chapter 6 Error Checking Static Load Cases 6-1

Error Checking.......................................................................................................................................... 6-2
Fatal Error Message....................................................................................................................... 6-3
Warning Message .......................................................................................................................... 6-4
Note Message ................................................................................................................................ 6-5
Building Static Load Cases....................................................................................................................... 6-8
Providing Wind Data ................................................................................................................................ 6-9
Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters.................................................................................................... 6-11
Execution of Static Analysis................................................................................................................... 6-12
Notes on CAESAR II Load Cases .......................................................................................................... 6-15
Definition of a Load Case............................................................................................................ 6-15
Load Case Options Tab ............................................................................................................... 6-19
User Control of Produced Results Data....................................................................................... 6-20
Output Status ............................................................................................................................... 6-20
Output Type................................................................................................................................. 6-20
Snubbers Active?......................................................................................................................... 6-20
Hanger Stiffness .......................................................................................................................... 6-20
Friction Multiplier ....................................................................................................................... 6-21
Elastic Modulus ........................................................................................................................... 6-21
User-Controlled Combination Methods....................................................................................... 6-21
Algebraic ..................................................................................................................................... 6-21
Scalar ........................................................................................................................................... 6-21
SRSS............................................................................................................................................ 6-22
ABS ............................................................................................................................................. 6-22
Max.............................................................................................................................................. 6-22
Min .............................................................................................................................................. 6-22
SignMax ...................................................................................................................................... 6-22
SignMin ....................................................................................................................................... 6-22
Recommended Load Cases.......................................................................................................... 6-22
Recommended Load Cases for Hanger Selection........................................................................ 6-23
4 Contents
Chapter 7 Static Output Processor 7-1

Entering the Static Output Processor ........................................................................................................ 7-2
Custom Reports Toolbar........................................................................................................................... 7-6
Custom Reports ........................................................................................................................................ 7-7
Report Template Editor ................................................................................................................. 7-7
Report Options........................................................................................................................................ 7-10
Displacements.............................................................................................................................. 7-10
Restraints ..................................................................................................................................... 7-11
Restraint Summary ...................................................................................................................... 7-11
Global Element Forces ................................................................................................................ 7-12
Local Element Forces .................................................................................................................. 7-12
Stresses ........................................................................................................................................ 7-13
Stress Summary ........................................................................................................................... 7-14
Code Compliance Report............................................................................................................. 7-15
Cumulative Usage Report............................................................................................................ 7-16
General Computed Results ..................................................................................................................... 7-17
Load Case Report ........................................................................................................................ 7-17
Hanger Table with Text............................................................................................................... 7-18
Input Echo ................................................................................................................................... 7-18
Miscellaneous Data ..................................................................................................................... 7-19
Warnings ..................................................................................................................................... 7-19
Output Viewer Wizard............................................................................................................................ 7-20
Printing or Saving Reports to a File Notes ............................................................................................. 7-21
3D/HOOPS Graphics in the Static Output Processor ............................................................................. 7-23
Animation of Static Results Notes.......................................................................................................... 7-26
Chapter 8 Dynamic Input and Analysis 8-1

Dynamic Capabilities in CAESAR II ....................................................................................................... 8-2
Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis ................................................................................. 8-3
Major Steps in Dynamic Input....................................................................................................... 8-4
Dynamic Analysis Input Processor Overview .......................................................................................... 8-5
Entering the Dynamic Analysis Input Menu ................................................................................. 8-5
Input Overview Based on Analysis Category ........................................................................................... 8-7
Modal............................................................................................................................................. 8-7
Specifying the Loads ..................................................................................................................... 8-7
Snubbers ........................................................................................................................................ 8-7
Control Parameters ........................................................................................................................ 8-8
Advanced Parameters Show Screen .............................................................................................. 8-8
Harmonic .................................................................................................................................................. 8-9
Specifying the Loads ..................................................................................................................... 8-9
Modifying Mass and Stiffness Model.......................................................................................... 8-10
Control Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 8-11
Earthquake (Spectrum) ........................................................................................................................... 8-12
Specifying the Loads ................................................................................................................... 8-12
Spectrum Load Cases .................................................................................................................. 8-14
Static/Dynamic Combinations ..................................................................................................... 8-15
Advanced Parameters .................................................................................................................. 8-16
Relief Loads (Spectrum) ......................................................................................................................... 8-17
Specifying the Loads ................................................................................................................... 8-17
Relief Load Synthesis.................................................................................................................. 8-17
Contents 5
DLF/Spectrum Generator - The Spectrum Wizard ................................................................................. 8-18

Save to File .................................................................................................................................. 8-19
OK ............................................................................................................................................... 8-19
Cancel .......................................................................................................................................... 8-19
UBC............................................................................................................................................. 8-20
Spectrum Name ........................................................................................................................... 8-20
Importance Factor........................................................................................................................ 8-20
Seismic Coefficient Ca ................................................................................................................ 8-21
Seismic Coefficient Cv................................................................................................................ 8-21
ASCE7......................................................................................................................................... 8-21
Spectrum Name ........................................................................................................................... 8-22
Site Coefficient Fa ....................................................................................................................... 8-22
Site Coefficient Fv....................................................................................................................... 8-22
Mapped MCESRA at Short Period (SS)...................................................................................... 8-22
Mapped MCESRA at One Second (S1)....................................................................................... 8-23
Response Modification R ............................................................................................................ 8-23
IBC .............................................................................................................................................. 8-23
Spectrum Name ........................................................................................................................... 8-24
Site Coefficient Fa ....................................................................................................................... 8-24
Site Coefficient Fv....................................................................................................................... 8-24
Mapped MCESRA at Short Period (SS)...................................................................................... 8-24
Mapped MCESRA at One Second (S1)....................................................................................... 8-25
Response Modification R ............................................................................................................ 8-25
B31.1 Appendix II (Safety Valve) Force Response Spectrum .................................................... 8-25
Spectrum Name ........................................................................................................................... 8-26
Opening Time (milliseconds) ...................................................................................................... 8-26
User Defined Time History Waveform ....................................................................................... 8-26
Spectrum Name ........................................................................................................................... 8-26
Max. Table Frequency................................................................................................................. 8-27
Number of Points......................................................................................................................... 8-27
Enter Pulse Data .......................................................................................................................... 8-27
Generate Spectrum ...................................................................................................................... 8-28
Spectrum Definitions................................................................................................................... 8-28
Force Sets .................................................................................................................................... 8-29
Spectrum/Load Cases .................................................................................................................. 8-30
Advanced..................................................................................................................................... 8-31
Water Hammer/Slug Flow (Spectrum) ................................................................................................... 8-32
Specifying the Load..................................................................................................................... 8-32
Pulse Table/DLF Spectrum Generation....................................................................................... 8-32
Spectrum Definitions................................................................................................................... 8-32
Force Sets .................................................................................................................................... 8-32
Spectrum Load Cases .................................................................................................................. 8-32
Time History........................................................................................................................................... 8-33
Specifying The Load ................................................................................................................... 8-33
Time History Profile Definitions ................................................................................................. 8-33
Force Sets .................................................................................................................................... 8-34
Time History Load Cases ............................................................................................................ 8-34
Modifying Mass and Stiffness Models ........................................................................................ 8-34
6 Contents

Advanced..................................................................................................................................... 8-35
Error Handling and Analyzing the Job ................................................................................................... 8-36
Performing the Analysis .............................................................................................................. 8-36
Modes .......................................................................................................................................... 8-37
Harmonic ..................................................................................................................................... 8-37
Selection of Phase Angles ........................................................................................................... 8-38
Spectrum...................................................................................................................................... 8-38
Time History................................................................................................................................ 8-38
Chapter 9 Dynamic Output Processing 9-1

Entry into the Processor ............................................................................................................................ 9-2
Report Types............................................................................................................................................. 9-5
Displacements................................................................................................................................ 9-5
Restraints ....................................................................................................................................... 9-5
Local Forces .................................................................................................................................. 9-7
Global Forces................................................................................................................................. 9-8
Stresses .......................................................................................................................................... 9-9
Forces/Stresses ............................................................................................................................ 9-10
Cumulative Usage ....................................................................................................................... 9-11
Mass Participation Factors........................................................................................................... 9-12
Natural Frequencies..................................................................................................................... 9-13
Modes Mass Normalized ............................................................................................................. 9-14
Modes Unity Normalized ............................................................................................................ 9-14
Included Mass Data ..................................................................................................................... 9-15
Input Listing ................................................................................................................................ 9-15
Mass Model ................................................................................................................................. 9-15
Boundary Conditions................................................................................................................... 9-16
Notes on Printing or Saving Reports to a File ........................................................................................ 9-17
3D/HOOPs Graphics in the Animation Processor .................................................................................. 9-18
Save Animation to File ................................................................................................................ 9-19
Animation of Static Results - Displacements .............................................................................. 9-19
Animation of Dynamic Results – Modal/Spectrum..................................................................... 9-20
Animation of Dynamic Results – Harmonic................................................................................ 9-20
Animation of Dynamic Results – Time History .......................................................................... 9-20
Chapter 10 Structural Steel Modeler 10-1

Overview of Structural Capability in CAESAR II.................................................................................. 10-2
3D/HOOPS Graphics.............................................................................................................................. 10-8
Sample Input......................................................................................................................................... 10-10
Structural Steel Example #1.................................................................................................................. 10-11
Chapter 11 Buried Pipe Modeling 11-1

CAESAR II Underground Pipe Modeler ................................................................................................ 11-2
Using the Underground Pipe Modeler .................................................................................................... 11-3
Notes on the Soil Model ......................................................................................................................... 11-9
Recommended Procedures.................................................................................................................... 11-11
Original Unburied Model...................................................................................................................... 11-12
Contents 7
Chapter 12 Equipment Component and Compliance 12-1

Intersection Stress Intensification Factors .............................................................................................. 12-3
Bend Stress Intensification Factors......................................................................................................... 12-6
Pressure Stiffening....................................................................................................................... 12-8
Flanges Attached to Bend Ends................................................................................................... 12-8
Bends with Trunnions.................................................................................................................. 12-8
Stress Concentrations and Intensification.................................................................................... 12-9
WRC 107 Vessel Stresses..................................................................................................................... 12-10
WRC 107 Stress Summations.................................................................................................... 12-15
WRC Bulletin 297 ................................................................................................................................ 12-17
Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations ..................................................................................................... 12-20
Note on Bolt Tightening Stress.................................................................................................. 12-24
Using the CAESAR II Flange Modeler ..................................................................................... 12-25
Leak Pressure Ratio ................................................................................................................... 12-25
Effective Gasket Modulus ......................................................................................................... 12-25
Flange Rating............................................................................................................................. 12-26
Remaining Strength of Corroded Pipelines, B31G ............................................................................... 12-28
Expansion Joint Rating ......................................................................................................................... 12-32
Structural Steel Checks - AISC............................................................................................................. 12-39
Global Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 12-39
Structural Code.......................................................................................................................... 12-40
Allowable Stress Increase Factor............................................................................................... 12-40
Stress Reduction Factors Cmy and Cmz.................................................................................... 12-40
Young’s Modulus ...................................................................................................................... 12-40
Material Yield Strength ............................................................................................................. 12-40
Bending Coefficient................................................................................................................... 12-40
Form Factor Qa.......................................................................................................................... 12-40
Allow Sidesway......................................................................................................................... 12-41
Resize Members Whose Unity Check Value Is . . .................................................................... 12-41
Minimum Desired Unity Check................................................................................................. 12-41
Maximum Desired Unity Check................................................................................................ 12-41
Local Member Data ................................................................................................................... 12-42
Member Start Node ................................................................................................................... 12-42
Member End Node .................................................................................................................... 12-42
Member Type ............................................................................................................................ 12-42
In- And Out-Of-Plane Fixity Coefficients Ky And Kz.............................................................. 12-43
Unsupported Axial Length ........................................................................................................ 12-43
Unsupported Length (In-Plane Bending)................................................................................... 12-43
Unsupported Length (Out-Of-Plane Bending)........................................................................... 12-43
Double Angle Spacing............................................................................................................... 12-43
Young’s Modulus ...................................................................................................................... 12-43
Material Yield Strength ............................................................................................................. 12-43
Axial Member Force.................................................................................................................. 12-44
In-Plane Bending Moment......................................................................................................... 12-44
Out-of-Plane Bending Moment ................................................................................................. 12-44
In-Plane “Small” Bending Moment........................................................................................... 12-44
In-Plane “Large” Bending Moment........................................................................................... 12-44
Out-of-Plane “Small” Bending Moment.................................................................................... 12-44
Out-of-Plane “Large” Bending Moment.................................................................................... 12-44
AISC Output Reports................................................................................................................. 12-45
Differences Between the 1977 and 1989 AISC Codes .............................................................. 12-46
NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) ........................................................................................................... 12-47
NEMA Turbine Example........................................................................................................... 12-48
8 Contents
API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) ............................................................................................................... 12-54

Vertical In-Line Pumps ............................................................................................................. 12-59
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors) ..................................................................................................... 12-60
API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) ............................................................................................... 12-62
Heat Exchange Institute Standard For Closed Feedwater Heaters........................................................ 12-67
API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services) ....................................................................... 12-68
CH AP TER 1
Chapter 1 Introduction
In This Chapter
What is CAESAR II?............................................................................... 1-2
What are the Applications of CAESAR II? ............................................. 1-3
What Distinguishes CAESAR II From Other Pipe Stress Packages? ...... 1-4
About the CAESAR II Documentation.................................................... 1-5
Program Support/User Assistance ........................................................... 1-6
Software Revision Procedures ................................................................. 1-7
Updates and License Types ..................................................................... 1-9
Program Changes..................................................................................... 1-10
Technical Changes................................................................................... 1-12
1-2 Introduction
What is CAESAR II?

CAESAR II is a PC-based pipe stress analysis software program developed, marketed and sold by COADE Engineering
Software. This software package is an engineering tool used in the mechanical design and analysis of piping systems. The
CAESAR II user creates a model of the piping system using simple beam elements and defines the loading conditions
imposed on the system. With this input, CAESAR II produces results in the form of displacements, loads, and stresses
throughout the system. Additionally, CAESAR II compares these results to limits specified by recognized codes and
standards. The popularity of CAESAR II is a reflection of COADE’s expertise in programming and engineering, as well as
COADE’s dedication to service and quality.
What are the Applications of CAESAR II?

CAESAR II is most often used for the mechanical design of new piping systems. Hot piping systems present a unique
problem to the mechanical engineer—these irregular structures experience great thermal strain that must be absorbed by the
piping, supports, and attached equipment. These “structures” must be stiff enough to support their own weight and also
flexible enough to accept thermal growth. These loads, displacements, and stresses can be estimated through analysis of the
piping model in CAESAR II. To aid in this design by analysis, CAESAR II incorporates many of the limitations placed on
these systems and their attached equipment. These limits are typically specified by engineering bodies (such as the ASME
B31 committees, ASME Section VIII, and the Welding Research Council) or by manufacturers of piping-related equipment
(API, NEMA, or EJMA).
CAESAR II is not limited to thermal analysis of piping systems. CAESAR II also has the capability of modeling and analyzing
the full range of static and dynamic loads, which may be imposed on the system. Therefore, CAESAR II is not only a tool for
new design but it is also valuable in troubleshooting or redesigning existing systems. Here, one can determine the cause of
failure or evaluate the severity of unanticipated operating conditions such as fluid/piping interaction or mechanical vibration
caused by rotating equipment.
1-4 Introduction
What Distinguishes CAESAR II From Other Pipe Stress

Packages?
COADE treats CAESAR II more as a service than a product. Our staff of experienced pipe stress engineers are involved in
day-to-day software development, program support, and training. This approach has produced a program, which most
closely fits today’s requirements of the pipe stress industry. Data entry is simple and straight forward through annotated
input screens and/or spreadsheets. CAESAR II provides the widest range of modeling and analysis capabilities without
becoming too complicated for simple system analysis. Users may tailor their CAESAR II installation through default setting
and customized databases. Comprehensive input graphics confirms the model construction before the analysis is made. The
program’s interactive output processor presents results on the monitor for quick review or sends complete reports to a file or
printer. CAESAR III is an up-to-date package that not only utilizes standard analysis guidelines but also provides the latest
recognized opinions for these analyses.
CAESAR II also offers seamless interaction with COADE’s CADWorx/PIPE, an AutoCAD based design and drafting system
for creating orthographic, isometric and 3D piping drawings. The 2-way-link automatically generates stress analysis models
of piping layouts, or creates spectacular stress isometrics in minutes from CAESAR II models.
CAESAR II is a field-proven engineering analysis program. It is a widely recognized product with a large customer base and
an excellent support and development record. COADE is a strong and stable company where service is a major
commitment.
About the CAESAR II Documentation

To address the sheer volume of information available on CAESAR II and present it in a concise and useful manner to the
analyst the program documentation is presented in three separate manuals:
1. The User Guide describes the basic operation and flow of the many routines found in CAESAR II. This document
provides necessary installation information, gives an overview of the program capabilities, and introduces model
creation, analysis, and output review. It is intended as a general road map for the program. This general document is
the first source of information.
2. The Technical Reference Manual explains, in detail, the function of, input for, and output from each module of the
program. This manual also explains much of the theory behind CAESAR II calculations. The Technical Reference
Manual should be referred to whenever the user needs more information than is provided by the User Guide.
3. The Application Guide provides examples of how to use CAESAR II. These examples illustrate methods of modeling
individual piping components as well as complete piping systems. Here one can find tutorials on system modeling
and analysis. The Application Guide is a reference providing quick “how to” information on specific subjects.
In addition to these three manuals, a Quick Reference Guide is included with the software package. The Quick Reference
Guide provides the user with commonly referenced information in a lightweight, easy-to-carry notebook.
1-6 Introduction
Program Support/User Assistance

COADE’s staff understands that CAESAR II is not only a complex analysis tool but also, at times, an elaborate process—one
that may not be obvious to the casual user. While our documentation is intended to address the questions raised regarding
piping analysis, system modeling, and results interpretation, not all the answers can be quickly found in these volumes.
COADE understands the engineer’s need to produce efficient, economical, and expeditious designs. To that end, COADE
has a staff of helpful professionals ready to address any CAESAR II issues raised by all users. CAESAR II support is available
by telephone, fax, the Internet, and by mail; literally hundreds of support calls are answered every week. COADE provides
this service at no additional charge to the user. It is expected, however, that questions focus on the current version of the
program.
Formal training in CAESAR II and pipe stress analysis is also available from COADE. COADE conducts regular training
classes in Houston and provides in-house and open attendance courses around the world. These courses focus on the
expertise available at COADE—modeling, analysis, and design.
COADE Technical Support:
Phone: 281-890-4566 E-mail: techsupport@coade.com
Fax: 281-890-3301 Web: www.coade.com

Software Revision Procedures

COADE software products are not static; they are changed continually to reflect engineering code addenda, operational
enhancements, user requests, operating system modifications, and corrections. New versions are planned and targeted for a
specific release date. However, there may be corrections necessary to the “currently shipping” version, before the next
version can be released. When this occurs, a correction to the “currently shipping” version is made. This correction is
referred to as a “Build.”
Changes and corrections are accumulated until an error producing incorrect results is found. When this occurs, the build is
finalized, announced, and posted to the Web site. Some COADE users have expressed concern over tracking, archiving, and
distributing the various builds generated between major releases. In order to alleviate this problem for our users, all
maintenance Builds for new releases contain all previous builds. In other words, Build Y contains Build X. This increases
the download size and time required to obtain the Build, but only one build is required at any given time.
Identifying Builds
When posted on the Web, builds are identified with the program identifier and the date the Build was generated for example
C2YYY-YYMMDD.EXE.
Can Builds Be Applied To Any Version?

No! As new versions are released, additional input items become necessary and must be stored in the program data files. In
addition, file formats change; databases grow, and so on. A Build is intended for one specific version of the software. Using
a Build on a different version (without specific advice from COADE personnel) is a sure way to cripple the software.
Announcing Builds
When a Build becomes available, the NEWS file maintained on the Web site is updated. All entries in this news file are
dated for ease of reference. Users should check one of these news files at least once a month to ensure they stay current with
the software.
Corrections and Builds are also published in the COADE newsletter, Mechanical Engineering News.
If users register with an E-mail address, they will be notified via E-mail of all new Builds.
Obtaining Builds
Builds are posted to COADE’s Internet Web site http://www.coade.com and are arranged in subdirectories by program.
Each file contained in the directory includes a description defining what it contains, its size, and the date it was created.
Decide which Build file you need and download it.
What is Contained In A Specific Build?

Each patch file contains a file named BUILD.TXT. This is a plain ASCII text file that can be viewed with any text editor or
sent to the system printer. This text file contains a description of all corrections and enhancements made, which are
contained in the current patch. When necessary, additional usage instructions may be found in this file.
Installing Builds
Builds distributed for Windows applications use a Windows installation procedure. The EXE is a self-extracting archive,
which extracts to a number of sub-directories; each containing sufficient files to fit on a CD The CD contains a standard
SETUP.EXE program to actually install the Build. This procedure ensures that necessary files are registered with the system
and that the “Uninstall” utility can perform its task.
1-8 Introduction
Detecting/Checking Builds
When a Build is ready to be released, the Main Menu module is revised to reflect the Build level. This allows the user to
see, on the Main Program Menu, which Build is in use. To see which program modules have been modified, you can run a
COADE utility program from within the program directory.
From the Diagnostics menu, select the Build Version option. This option scans each of the EXE modules in the program
directory and lists its size, memory requirements, and Build Level. A sample display from this utility is shown in the table
below.
By reviewing the following table, users can determine which modules have been patched and to what level.
Archiving and Reinstalling an Old, Patched Version

When a new version of the software is released, what should be done with the old, existing version? The distribution disks
sent from COADE should obviously be saved. Additionally, any Builds obtained should also be archived. This will allow
full usage of this version at some later time, if it becomes necessary.
To reinstall an older version of the software, the distribution CDs from COADE should be installed first. Then, the last
Build should be installed. Each Build includes the modifications made in all prior Builds.
Updates and License Types

Users can identify CAESAR II update sets by their version number. The current release of CAESAR II is Version 5.10.
COADE schedules and distributes these updates approximately every nine months, depending on their scope and necessity.
The type of CAESAR II license determines whether or not a user receives these updates. There are three types of
CAESAR II licenses:
Full Run
A full run provides unlimited access to CAESAR II and one year of updates, maintenance, and support. Updates,
maintenance, and support are available on an annual basis after the first year.
Lease
A lease provides unlimited access to CAESAR II with updates, maintenance, and support provided as long as the lease is in
effect.
Limited Run
A limited run provides 50 static or dynamic analyses of piping system models over an unlimited period of time, but does not
include program updates. The user is upgraded (if necessary) whenever a new set of 50 “runs” is purchased.
COADE only ships the current version of CAESAR II, no matter which type of license. Updates are automatically delivered
to all full run users who purchase updates, maintenance, and support, and all lease users.
1-10 Introduction
Program Changes
This list details the new or changed capabilities and features of CAESAR II Version 5.10.
Added PD-8010 Part 1 and Part 2.
Revised due to “code” changes: B31.1, B31.3, Z662, EN-13480
Updated stainless steel pipe specification data per B36.19M.
Revised Wind and Seismic load calculations to ASCE #7 2005.
Revised API-661 to 6th Edition.
Added a number of European materials to the material database.
Added Chinese structural steel and expansion joint databases h
Enhanced Static Load Case Editor
Added In-Line Flange Evaluation at the load case level.
Added the ability to alter the “occasional load multiplier” on a “per load case basis”.
Added the ability to “import” static load data from different jobs
Added the ability to copy wind and wave vectors.
Graphics Improvements:
Graphics rendering speed improved by 20% to 50% depending on the job.
Added the ability to import an Autocad (CADWorx) model directly into the piping input, to provide visualization
of supporting steel, vessels and other equipment.
Static Output Processor Improvements

Reduced report generation times by 70% or better
Changed presentation in tabbed window to allow viewing multiple reports, and immediate switching between
reports.
Added ability to select Individual items from the Miscellaneous Report
Added ability to zoom reports and individually direct reports to an output device via a “context menu”
Added import and export of custom report templates.
Added support for B31.3 Section 319.2.3(c), allowing axial stress to be included in the Expansion Code Stress.
Added user control over whether or not insulation should be considered in hydro test cases.
Updated DIN pipe size specification to comply with EN-10220 (seamless) instead of DIN-2458 (welded).
Added spring hanger data from Gradior Power, (Czech Republic).
Added flange rating evaluation per B16.5.
1-12 Introduction
Technical Changes
The following list details changes to CAESAR II for Version 5.10, which may affect the numeric results.
Corrected the system weight distribution in the restrained weight case when hanger operating loads are defined by the
user), (060301 build).
Modified the SIF calculations for ASME NC/ND (July 2005 addendum), (060301 build).
Corrected the determination of the governing code stress for combination load cases for Offshore, Z662, and BS-7159
codes.
Corrected the auto-computation of the “B31.3 Wc” value for bends, (070122 build).
EN-13480:
Corrected the use of sweepolets, weldolets, and extruded tees so that they use the same SIF computations as
Unreinforced tees.
Changed the “default occasional load factor” from 1.33 to 1.00.
Corrected the computation of the allowable stress for the EN-13480 (060426 build) and CODETI (060707 build) codes
Expansion case.
Corrected the usage of the effective section modulus for reducing tees for both CODETI and EN-13480.
Modified the usage of the hanger stiffness values when using the as designed option for hanger design, (060426 build).
Updated ASCE #7 wind load generation to 2005 Edition:
Updated Table 6-1 for Importance Factor
Updated Table 6-2 for Exposure Constants zg and alpha
Updated the equation for Kz.
Updated limiting conditions for the determination of Kzt.
Updated the gust factor computation.
B31.1 A2005 introduced a number of changes that will affect existing jobs. These changes are:
If the program is allowed to update the allowable stresses, higher values will be acquired.
The Sc and Sh values used to determine the Expansion allowable are now limited to 20 ksi.
In Table 102.1.2.a, “note a” changes the “y” value from 0.4 to 0.0. This will only affect the minimum wall thickness
calculation.
Corrections have been made to the butt weld and branch connection restrictions
The addendum exchanged the equations (between the figure and the notes) used to compute the flexibility characteristic
for welding tees and welded-in contour inserts (sweepolets). This change will cause the SIFs for these fittings to
change accordingly. CAESAR II defaults to the updated equation in the figure, which is more conservative. Users can
control this choice with a new configuration option. B31.1 and B31.3 now match in this regard.
CH AP TER 2
Chapter 2 Installation
In This Chapter
Overview ................................................................................................. 2-2
System and Hardware Requirements ....................................................... 2-3
Installing CAESAR II Overview ............................................................. 2-4
ESL Installation on a Network................................................................. 2-15
Notes on Network ESLs .......................................................................... 2-16
2-2 Installation
Overview
This chapter explains the CAESAR II installation process.
System and Hardware Requirements

CAESAR II requires either Windows 2000 or Windows XP to operate efficiently. Any computer configured to run either one
of these operating systems will be sufficient to run CAESAR II provided the graphics card is capable of at least 1024x768
resolution.
2-4 Installation
Installing CAESAR II Overview

To begin installation, insert the CD in to the drive. The installation routine will start and the following screen displays.
This dialog contains four main controls and enables users to:
• Install – Initiates the actual installation procedure.

• Products – Lists all of the COADE products.
• Contact Info – Displays COADE contact information.
• Exit – Closes this dialog.
Installation
Begin installation by clicking Install, the dialog changes to show all of the installation options, as shown in the figure
below.
Selecting Install CAESAR II 5.10 launches the installation of CAESAR II software. The first operation is the extraction of
the MSI file.
Selecting Install ESL Driver launches Aladdin’s stand-alone installation for the HASP driver, necessary to access the
hardware key.
Selecting Install Acrobat Reader launches Adobe’s stand-alone installation for Acrobat Reader, necessary to access the
CAESAR II documentation files.
From the dialog click Install under the CAESAR II 5.10 link. As installation begins, a dialog opens displaying a progress
indicator and the name of the file extracted.
2-6 Installation
Note: It is best if nothing else is running while the installation program runs. Most unsuccessful installation attempts can
be attributed to other software running at the same time as the installation.
After the program completes extracting all the necessary files the Welcome message displays click Next to continue the
installation.
The CAESAR II License Agreement displays.

To continue the installation users must click the I accept the terms in the license agreement option.
Click Next to continue. The dialog to set the installation folder displays next, as shown in the figure below.
Tip: The default destination directory is “c:\program files\coade\<product name>”, where “<product name>” reflects the
program name and version.
2-8 Installation
To install the software in another location, click the Change button to the right of the dialog and the following dialog
displays.
In the Folder Name box, type the new destination folder, or use the buttons to the right to browse for the desired location.
After defining the proper destination folder click OK. This will return control to the Destination Folder dialog (shown
above), from which Next should be clicked to continue the installation process
Once this dialog is complete, the Language dialog displays; this dialog allows the user to select from various languages,
which dictate the language resource files that are installed.
After selecting the language click Next The Select ESL Color dialog displays.
This selection defines whether a Local or Network key will be used, which determines which driver gets loaded. Select the
appropriate ESL color, and then click Next.
Tip: An additional dialog is presented to allow one last chance to abort the installation.
Click Install to transfer the software from the CD to the target destination directory.
2-10 Installation
As the installation progresses, the status displays in a series of progress bars, as depicted in the figure below.
Once the files have been transferred, the CAESAR II Configuration Module screen follows.
This module enables users to set the default configuration for this particular workstation. Click Exit w/ Save to continue.
Note: It is highly recommended that users familiarize themselves with the configuration directives. A full discussion of
them can be found in the CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual.
2-12 Installation
After the Configuration directives are set the Aladdin device driver installation routine is launched to install the driver for
the hardware lock, as shown in the figure below.
After installing the Aladdin Device Drivers the installation routine cleans up and presents the next dialog.
To view the Readme.doc file click the Show the readme file check box before clicking Finish.
Since a device driver was loaded, it is a good idea to restart Windows®. The final dialog provides options to immediately
restart Windows, or to terminate the installation. Select the appropriate button.
Installing CAESAR II in Silent Mode

In some instances it may be desired to install CAESAR II without dealing with the dialogs, such as a network installation or a
corporate repackaging. To launch the installation in “silent mode”, with no interaction from the user, perform these steps:
1. Navigate to the CAESAR II subdirectory on the CD.

2. Issue the installation command as detailed below. Typically the ESL_ON_MACHINE and INSTALL_SILENT
options are not necessary.
Command
Cmd= setup.exe /v"/qb PROPERTY_NAME="value" PROPERTY_NAME2="Value""
The /v switch is to pass msi commands

The /qb is a silent switch
Example:
Setup.exe /v"/qb INSTALL_SILENT="Yes" LANG="Eng" ESL_COLOR="Green""
This example installs silent with language English and ESL color green.
Setup.exe /v"/qb INSTALL_SILENT="Yes" LANG="Eng" ESL_COLOR="Red" ESL_ON_MACHINE="Yes""
This example installs silent with ESL color red and ESL install locally.
Properties
•INSTALLDIR (The path to load the installation files)
·<target_dir>
•LANG (The language to install)
·Eng (English)
·Span (Spanish)
·Ger (Germen)
·Fren (French)
2-14 Installation
•ESL_COLOR (The ESL color)
·Red
·Green
•ESL_ON_MACHINE (This is only set if ESL color is red which is if the ESL will be on local machine or server)
·Yes
·No
•INSTALL_SILENT (Is to tell the install it's silent)
·Yes
·No
ESL Installation on a Network

COADE software programs support two different ESLs, “local” ESLs and “network” ESLs. Both types of ESLs are intended
to be attached to the USB ports of the applicable computers. The local ESLs provide the maximum flexibility in using the
software, since these devices can be moved between computers (i.e., between desktops and laptops). If your computer uses a
local ESL, the remainder of this section can be skipped.
The network ESL must be attached to the USB port of any machine on the network (this can be a workstation or the file
server). The file server is a better location for this ESL, since it will usually be up and running. If the network ESL is
attached to a workstation, the workstation must be running and/or logged onto the network before anyone can use the
software.
In order for the network to recognize the ESL, a utility program must be loaded on the machine controlling the ESL. The
actual utility used depends on whether the ESL is on the file server or a workstation and the type of network. The drivers for
network ESL usage can be found in the sub-directory ASSIDRV beneath the CAESAR II program directory. The
documentation files in this sub-directory contain instructions for a variety of networks and operating systems.
Novell File Server ESL Installation

If the network ESL is to be located on a Novell file server, the driver HASPSERV.NLM is needed. This driver should be
copied onto the file server, into the top level SYSTEM directory. Then, the system startup file (AUTOEXEC.NCF) should
be modified to include the command LOAD HASPSERV.
This modification can be accomplished with SYSCON (or equivalent) assuming Supervisor rights.
Novell Workstation ESL Installation

If the network ESL is to be located on a workstation, the driver HASPSERV.EXE is needed. This driver should be copied
onto the workstation. The actual location (directory) on the workstation is not important, as long as the program can be
located for startup. Place the command, HASPSERV, in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file of the workstation, after the commands
which load the network drivers. The workstation does not need to be logged in. Note, however, the workstation must always
be up and running for users to access the software.
Windows Server Installation

For a Windows server installation, refer to the documentation files NETHASP.TXT and ESL_RED.TXT found in the
Assidrv subdirectory for network specific instructions.
2-16 Installation
Notes on Network ESLs

There are advantages and disadvantages in utilizing a network ESL. The prime advantage is that many users (up to the
number of licenses) have access (from a variety of computers) to the software on a single server.
The prime disadvantage is that users cannot transfer the ESL between machines in order to take the software to a remote
location.
Since both a network and several local ESLs may be initialized on the same system (there is no network-specific version of
the software), it is suggested that only 70 to 80 percent of the desired licenses be assigned to a network ESL. The remaining
20 to 30 percent of the licenses should be assigned to local ESLs. This enables the local ESLs to be moved between
computers, to run the software at remote locations. Alternatively, if all of the licenses are on the network ESL, a user must
then be logged into the network to access the software. A few local ESLs provide much greater operating flexibility.
CH AP TER 3
Chapter 3 Quick Start and Basic Operation
In This Chapter
CAESAR II Quick Start........................................................................... 3-2
Basic Operation ....................................................................................... 3-5
3-2 Quick Start and Basic Operation
CAESAR II Quick Start

This chapter explains the basics of CAESAR II operation, to enable users to quickly perform a static piping analysis. All
necessary user operations are discussed; however, details have been kept to a minimum. Each topic includes references to
other sections of the CAESAR II User Guide for additional detailed information.
The use of CAESAR II assumes that the software has been installed as per the instructions detailed in Chapter 2.
There are several steps required to perform a static analysis, the major steps (and the chapters in which they are described)
display below. These steps are explained briefly in this chapter.
• START CAESAR II (Chapter 4)

• GENERATE INPUT (Chapter 5)
• PERFORM ERROR CHECKING (Chapter 6)
• BUILD LOAD CASES (Chapter 6)
• EXECUTE STATIC ANALYSIS (Chapter 6)
• REVIEW OUTPUT (Chapter 7)
Note: A complete tutorial is provided in the CAESAR II Applications Guide.
Starting CAESAR II
Launch CAESAR II by double-clicking the CAESAR II icon, which should point to the program C2.EXE in the CAESAR II
Installation directory. Note that launching any of the other executable programs in the CAESAR II Installation directory
can result in unpredictable behavior, at this point the Main Menu displays. It is from the Main Menu that users select jobs,
analysis types, invoke executions, and initiate output reviews. Main Menu options are described in detail in Chapter 4 of
this document—for the purposes of this “Quick Start” chapter, only the File, Input, Analysis, and Output menus are used.
Main Menu
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes—subsequent input, analysis, or output review
references the job name specified. The job name is selected using the File menu, using one of three methods.
New Job Name Dialog

Whenever users wish to begin a new job, selecting File-New (or clicking the New icon from the toolbar) requires the user to
enter a job name and data directory. For the purposes of this example, users should enter a name, select Piping Input, and
select an alternate directory for the file, if desired.
Note: Selecting FILE-OPEN (or clicking the Open icon on the toolbar) presents users with a dialog to select an existing file.
Select recently used files from the RECENT PIPING/STRUCTURAL FILE option on the File Menu.
Note: Enabling Structural Input opens the Structural Steel Wizard. See Chapter 4 of the CAESAR II Technical
Reference Manual for more information.
Selecting a job name does not open the file; as noted, it indicates the job on which input modeling, analysis, output review,
or other operations will be done. Users must still select one of these operations from the menu.
Open Dialog
CAESAR II gives users the option to archive input files. Enter a password between 6 and 24 characters in length. You are
prompted to repeat this information to eliminate the possibility of incorrectly entering the password. Archived input files
cannot be altered and/or saved without this password however; they can be opened and reviewed.
Archive Password Dialog

Basic Operation
Once you have started the program and opened the file, you will choose the required operation.
Piping Input Generation

After specifying the job name users can launch the interactive model builder by selecting INPUT-PIPING from the Main Menu.
Input generation of the model consists of describing the piping elements, as well as any external influences (boundary
conditions or loads) acting on those elements. Each pipe element is identified by two node numbers, and requires the
specification of geometric, cross sectional, and material data. The preferred method of data entry is the Piping Spreadsheet.
Piping Input Spreadsheet

Each pipe element is described on its own spreadsheet. Data, which is likely to be constant, is automatically duplicated by
CAESAR II to subsequent spreadsheets. This means that for many elements, the user must only confirm the numbers and
enter the delta-dimensions. When necessary, point specific data can easily be entered on the appropriate element’s
spreadsheet.
The menus, toolbars, and accelerators offer a number of additional commands that users can invoke to enter auxiliary
processors or use special modelers or databases. The commands and general input instructions of the piping spreadsheet are
discussed in detail in Chapter 5.
Entering the First Element (Element 10-20) of a Simple Model:

1 Enter the value 10-0 (10 ft) in the DX field.
2 Enter the value 8 (8-in. nominal) in the Diameter field. The program automatically converts this value to the actual
diameter.
3 Enter “S” (standard schedule pipe wall) in the Wt/Sch field. This is automatically converted to wall thickness.
4 Enter 600 (degrees Fahrenheit) in the Temp 1 field.
5 Enter 150 (psig) in the Pressure 1 field.
6 Double-click the Bend check box. The Bends tab displays. This adds a long radius bend at the end of the element, and
adds intermediate nodes 18 and 19 at the near weld and mid points of the bend respectively (node 20 physically
represents the far weld point of the bend).
7 Double-click the Restraint check box. The Restraint tab displays. In the first Node field enter 10; then select ANC
from the first Type drop list.
8 Select A106 B from the Material drop list. This selection fills in the material parameters such as density and modulus
elasticity.
9 Double-click the Allowable Stress check box and select the B31.3 code from the Code drop list.
Note: Allowable stresses for the given material, temperature, and code display automatically.
10 Enter 0.85SG (0.85 specific gravity) in the Fluid Density field. The program automatically converts this value to
density. To enter the second element of the model, press Alt-C, or click the Skip to Next Element icon, or use the Edit-
Continue button to move to the spreadsheet for a new element, element 20-30.
Note: Node numbers are automatically generated, distributed and data is carried forward from previous spreadsheets.
11 Enter the value 10-0 (10 feet) in the DY field.
12 Double-click the Restraint check box. In the first Node field, enter 30; then select ANC from the first Type drop list.
The two-element model (an ell-configuration anchored at each end) is now complete.
The piping preprocessor also provides interactive graphics and listing functions to facilitate model editing and verification.
The CAESAR Ii Piping Preprocessor is designed to make these tasks intuitive and efficient. Model verification can be
performed using either the Graphics or List utilities, although a combination of both modes is recommended. The
Graphics and List utilities are discussed in Chapter 5 of this manual. The CAESAR II Graphics screen, displays by
default, next to the input spreadsheet. However, the spreadsheet can be collapsed to provide maximum graphic space as
shown below.
CAESAR II Input Graphics Screen

Once the model is completed, it must be checked for errors before analysis is permitted. This can be done using the File-
Error Check menu option or the Error Check icon on the toolbar.
Error Checking the Model

The two main functions of this error checker; is first to verify the user’s input data, and second to build the execution data
files utilized by the remainder of CAESAR II.
Verification of the user’s input data consists of checking each individual piping element for consistency. Errors discovered
which would prevent CAESAR II from running (such as a corrosion allowance greater than the wall thickness) are flagged as
fatal errors to the user.
Unusual items (such as a change of direction without a bend or intersection) are flagged as warnings to the user.
Other messages, of an informational type, may show intermediate calculations or general notes. Error messages display
in red text, Notes display in blue text and Warnings display in green text.
All messages display in the Error Window next to the model graphics.
Clicking on an error or warning message highlights the associated element on the graphic display and positions the
spreadsheet to that element.
Users may review all the messages generated by using the scroll bar on the right side of the toolbar or arrow keys.
Users can sort error messages by Message Number, Element or Node Number and Message Text, by clicking the
column titles.
Users can print the entire error report or selected sections by clicking the Print button.
Users can choose to display only fatal errors or all errors by clicking the arrow beside the Error Checker icon.
If there is an error, users can return to the input module by clicking the Classic Piping Input tab.
If the error check process completes without fatal errors, a center of gravity report is presented and the analysis data files
can be generated and then the solution phase can commence.
Center of Gravity Report

If fatal errors exist, the analysis data files are not generated and the solution phase cannot begin. Users must make
corrections and rerun the Error Checker successfully before analysis is permitted.
Building the Load Cases

A static analysis can be started from the Main Menu, or the piping input, once the analysis data files have been generated by
the error checker. The first stage of a static analysis is to set up the load cases. For new jobs (no previous solution files
available), the static analysis module recommends load cases to the user based on the load types encountered in the input
file. These recommended load cases are usually sufficient to satisfy the piping code requirements for the Sustained and
Expansion load cases. If the recommended load cases are not satisfactory, the user has the option of directly modifying
them.
Selecting the Analysis-Statics option from the Main Menu, or selecting the EDIT-EDIT STATIC LOAD CASES option from the
piping preprocessor, launches the Load Case Builder.
Load Case Builder

Loads can be built two ways—by 1) combining the load components defined in the input (weight, displacements, thermal
cases, etc.) into load cases (basic cases), and 2) combining pre-existing load cases into new load cases (combination cases).
Users can build the basic cases by selecting (one or more load components), dragging, and dropping load components from
the Loads Defined in Input list (in the left hand column) to the Load Cases list on the right. Stress Types (indicating
which code equations should be used to calculate and check the stresses) can be selected from the Stress Type list on each
line.
Combination cases, if present, must always follow the basic cases. Users can build combination cases by selecting (one or
more load components), dragging, and dropping basic load cases from earlier in the load case list to combine cases (or blank
load cases) later in the Load Cases list.
Note: Load cases may also be built by typing on any of the individual lines.
Executing Static Analysis

Once the load cases have been defined, the user begins the actual finite element solution through the use of the File-Analyze
command on the toolbar, or by clicking the Start Run icon on the toolbar located in the Static Load Case Builder. The
solution phase commences with the generation of the element stiffness matrices and load vectors, and solves for
displacements, forces and moments, reactions, and stresses. This solution phase also performs the design and selection of
spring hangers, and iterative stiffness matrix modifications for nonlinear restraints. The user is kept apprised of the solution
status throughout the calculation.
Static Output Review

A review of the static analysis results is possible immediately after a static solution or at a later time by selecting the
Output-Static option of the CAESAR II Main Menu. The static output processor presents the user with an interactive
selection menu from which load cases and report options can be selected.
Results can be reviewed by selecting one or more load cases along with one or more reports (selection is done by clicking,
Ctrl-clicking, and Shift-clicking the mouse). The results can be reviewed on the terminal, printed, or sent to a file, by using
the View Reports, MS Word, File-Save/SaveAs, or File-Print menu commands and/or toolbars.
The user can also use the View-Plot menu command or the Plot toolbar to review the analytic results in graphics mode,
which can produce displaced shapes, stress distributions, and restraint actions.
Output Graphics Screen

The actual study of the results depends on the purpose of each load case, and the reason for the analysis. Usually the review
checks that the system stresses are below their allowables, restraint loads are acceptable, and displacements are not
excessive. Additional post processing (such as equipment, nozzle, and structural steel checks) may be required depending
on the model and type of analysis.
Once the review of the output is finished, the user can return to the main CAESAR II menu by exiting the output review
module.
CH AP TER 4
Chapter 4 Main Menu
In This Chapter
The CAESAR II Main Menu ................................................................... 4-2
File Menu................................................................................................. 4-3
Input Menu .............................................................................................. 4-5
Analysis Menu ......................................................................................... 4-6
Output Menu............................................................................................ 4-7
Tools Menu.............................................................................................. 4-8
Diagnostics Menu .................................................................................... 4-9
ESL Menu................................................................................................ 4-10
View Menu .............................................................................................. 4-11
Help Menu ............................................................................................... 4-12
4-2 Main Menu
The CAESAR II Main Menu
CAESAR II Main Menu

CAESAR II may be started by double clicking the CAESAR II icon, or by running C2.EXE from the CAESAR II
Installation directory.
After starting CAESAR II, the Main Menu appears. It is recommended that this screen be kept at its minimal size (as shown
above). This allows access to the toolbar while freeing most of the screen for other applications.
The Main Menu is used to direct the actions of CAESAR II. As elsewhere in CAESAR II commands may be accessed from
menus, as well as toolbars and/or keystroke combinations. The available menu options are briefly described here with
further detail available elsewhere in this document or in the CAESAR II Technical Reference Guide.
File Menu
The File menu may be used to do the following:
• Set Default Data Directory—Sets the default data (project) directory without selecting a specific job file. Some
CAESAR II options do not require that a job be selected, but must know in which directory to work.
Note The selection of the data directory is very important since any configuration, units, or other data files found in that
directory are considered to be “local” to that job.
• New—Starts a new piping or structural job.
When New is selected the user must designate whether this job is for a piping or structural model. The data directory where
the file is to be placed must be selected, either by entering it directly or by browsing.
Note: Selecting Structural Input launches the Structural Steel Wizard. For more information, see Chapter 4 of the
CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual for details.
File New Dialog

4-4 Main Menu
• Open—Opens an existing piping or structural job.
When Open is chosen the user is prompted to select an existing job file. Files of type “Piping,” “Pre-version 3.24 piping,”
or “Structural” may be displayed for selection (see below).
File Open Dialog

• Clean Up (delete) Files— Enables users to delete unwanted scratch files, listing files, input, and output files to retain
more hard disk space.
File Clean Up Dialog

• Recent Piping or Recent Structural Files —Displays the four most recently used piping or structural files in the File
menu.
• Exit—Closes CAESAR II.
Input Menu
Input Menu
Once a file is selected, the Input Menu indicates the available modules for the file type chosen.
Option Description
Inputs a CAESAR II Piping Model (see Chapter 5).
Piping
Converts existing piping model to buried pipe (see Chapter 11).

Underground
Inputs a CAESAR II Structural Model (see Chapter 10).

Structural Steel
4-6 Main Menu
Analysis Menu
Analysis Menu
The Analysis Menu allows the user to select from the different calculations available.
Option Description
Performs Static analysis of pipe and/or structure. This is available after error checking the input files (see Chapter 6).
Statics
Performs Dynamic analysis of pipe and/or structure. This is also available after error checking the input files (see Chapter 8).
Dynamics
SIFs Displays scratch pads used to calculate stress intensification factors at intersections and bends.
WRC 107/297 Calculates stresses in vessels due to attached piping (see Chapter 12).
Flanges Performs flange stress and leakage calculations (see Chapter 12).
B31.G Estimates pipeline remaining life (see Chapter 12).
Expansion Joint Rating Evaluates expansion joints using EJMA equations (see Chapter 12).
AISC Performs AISC code check on structural steel elements (see Chapter 12).
NEMA SM23 Evaluates piping loads on steam turbine nozzles (see Chapter 12).
API 610 Evaluates piping loads on centrifugal pumps (see Chapter 12).
API 617 Evaluates piping loads on compressors (see Chapter 12).
API 661 Evaluates piping loads on air-cooled heat exchangers (see Chapter 12).
HEI Standard Evaluates piping loads on feedwater heaters (see Chapter 12).
API 560 Evaluates piping loads on fired heaters (see Chapter 12).
Output Menu
Output Menu
The user is presented with all available output of piping and/or structural calculations, which may be selected for review.
Option Description
Displays Static results (see Chapter 7).
Statics
Harmonic Displays Harmonic Loading results (see Chapter 9).
Spectrum Modal Displays Natural Frequency/Mode Shape calculations or Uniform/Force Spectrum Loading results (see Chapter 9).
Time History Displays Time History Load Simulation results (see Chapter 9).
Animation Displays Animated Graphic simulations of any of the above results.

4-8 Main Menu
Tools Menu
Tools Menu
The Tools Menu includes various CAESAR II supporting utilities that are used for
Option Description
Customizes the behavior of CAESAR II, on a directory by directory basis. Enables the user to consider items such as
Configure/Setup treatment of corrosion, pressure stiffening, etc. differently for each directory, due to project or client considerations.
Calculator Launches an on-screen calculator.
Make Units files Creates custom sets of units.
Edits or adds to the CAESAR II Material database.

Material Data Base
Accounting Activates or customizes job accounting or generates accounting reports.
Multi-Job Analysis Enables the user to run a stream of jobs without operator intervention.
External Interfaces Displays the interfaces to and from third party software (both CAD and analytical).
Diagnostics Menu
Diagnostics Menu
Diagnostics are provided to help trouble shoot problem installations.
Option Description
CRC Check Verifies program files are not corrupted.
Build Version Determines the build version of CAESAR II files.
Error Review Reviews description of CAESAR II errors.
DLL Version Check Provides version information on library files used by CAESAR II.
4-10 Main Menu
ESL Menu
ESL Menu
The ESL Menu gives access to utilities, which interact with the External Software Lock.
Option Description
Displays data stored on the ESL.
Show Data
Generate Access Codes Allows runs to be added or other ESL changes, to be made either through Fax or E-mail (in conjunction with option
below).
Enter re-authorization Codes (see option above).
Check HASP Device Status Verifies the location and version of the ESL.
Install HASP Device Driver Installs the ESL Drivers.

View Menu
View Menu
The View Menu allows users to enable the status bar and all toolbars.
Option Description
Toolbar Enable users to display and/or customize a toolbar.
Status Bar Enables users to display a status bar at the bottom of the window.
4-12 Main Menu
Help Menu
Help Menu
Option Description
On Line Documentation Displays CAESAR II documentation in HTML or PDF format.
Desktop On-Line Help Launches COADE’s online technical support.
On-Line Registration Enables users with Internet access to register electronically with COADE.
Provides information on the best ways to contact COADE personnel for technical support and provides Internet links for
Information COADE downloads and information.
Check for Upgrades Enables users to verify the most current version of CAESAR II is installed.
Displays CAESAR II version and copyright information.

About CAESAR II
Throughout CAESAR II context-sensitive, on-screen help is available by clicking ? or [F1] while the cursor is in any input
field. A help screen displays showing a discussion and the required units if applicable.
Help Dialog
CH AP TER 5
Chapter 5 Piping Input
In This Chapter
Spreadsheet Overview ............................................................................. 5-2
Data Fields............................................................................................... 5-4
Auxiliary Data Area................................................................................. 5-9
Menu Commands..................................................................................... 5-24
3-D Modeler ............................................................................................ 5-39
5-2 Piping Input
Spreadsheet Overview
In order to input a piping model, one must either open a new or existing piping file from the Main Menu, and then choose
INPUT-PIPING. The CAESAR II Piping Input spreadsheet then appears.
Input Spreadsheet
This spreadsheet is used to describe the piping on an element-by-element basis. It consists of menu commands/toolbars,
which can be used to perform a number of supporting operations and data fields used to enter information about each piping
element. A graphic representation of the model automatically plots on the right and updates as new elements are added.
Customize Toolbar
CAESAR II enables the user to customize the Spreadsheet and 3D Graphic toolbars. You can determine which buttons
display and their locations, by right-clicking the mouse on the toolbar, which displays the following dialog
Customize Toolbar
Alternatively, users can customize the toolbar by pressing the <Shift> key, clicking a button and dragging it to the new
position. CAESAR II allows users to undo any changes by right clicking on the toolbar, which causes the Customize Toolbar
dialog to appear, and clicking the Reset button.
5-4 Piping Input
Data Fields
Data fields are grouped logically into blocks of related data on the left side of the screen. The right side of the screen offers
an auxiliary area; with changing data-fields that support items entered through check boxes (pressing [F12] alternatively
displays the various auxiliary screens). The data fields may be torn apart by double-clicking the [>>] button in the upper
right corner of each group. They can be arranged in any order, this aids in conserving window real estate and increasing
space for graphics. The following are the data-field blocks:
Node Numbers
Each element is identified by its end “node” number. Since each input screen represents a piping element, the element end
points - the From node and To node - must be entered. These points are used as locations at which information may be
entered or extracted. The From node and To node are both required data fields.
Note: CAESAR II can generate both values if the AUTO_NODE_INCREMENT directive is set to other than zero using
the Tools-Configure/Setup option of the Main Menu.
Element Lengths
Lengths of the elements are entered as delta dimensions according to the X, Y, and Z rectangular coordinate system
established for the piping system (note that the Y-axis represents the vertical axis). The delta dimensions DX, DY, and DZ,
are the measurements along the X, Y, and Z-axes between the From node and To node. In most cases only one of the three
cells will be used as the piping usually runs along the global axes. Where the piping element is skewed two or three entries
must be made. One or more entries must be made for all elements except “zero length” expansion joints.
Note: When using feet and inches for compound length and length units, valid entries in this (and most other length
fields) include formats such as: 3-6, 3 ft. -6 in, and 3-6-3/16.
Offsets can be used to modify the stiffness of the current element by adjusting its length and the orientation of its neutral
axis in 3-D space.
Element Direction Cosines
Clicking the Ellipsis (...) button to the right of the element lengths (DX, DY, and DZ) displays the Element dialog. The
Element dialog displays the total Length and Direction Cosines. Changes made to the total element Length, or Direction
Cosines may affect one or all of the element lengths (DX, DY, and DZ). Changes made to any of the element lengths (DX,
DY, and DZ) will affect both the total element Length and Direction Cosines.
Pipe Section Properties
The elements outside diameter, wall thickness, mill tolerance (plus mill tolerance is used for IGE/TD/12 piping code only),
and seam weld (IGE/TD/12 piping code only); corrosion allowance, and insulation thickness are entered in this block. These
data fields carry forward from one screen to the next during the input session and need only be entered for those elements at
which a change occurs. Nominal pipe sizes and schedules may be specified; CAESAR II converts these values to actual
outside diameter and wall thickness. Outside diameter and wall thickness are required data inputs.
Note: Nominal diameters, thicknesses, and schedule numbers are a function of the pipe size specification. ANSI, JIS, or
DIN is set via the TOOLS-CONFIGURE/SETUP option of the Main Menu or the Setup toolbar button.
5-6 Piping Input
Operating Conditions: Temperatures and Pressures
Up to nine temperatures and ten pressures (one extra for the hydrostatic test pressure) can be specified for each piping
element. (The button with the ellipses dots is used to activate a window showing extended operating conditions input). The
temperatures are actual temperatures (not changes from ambient). CAESAR II uses these temperatures to obtain the thermal
strain and allowable stresses for the element from the Material Database. As an alternative, the thermal strains may be
specified directly (see the discussion of ALPHA TOLERANCE in the Technical Reference Manual). Thermal strains have
absolute values on the order of 0.002, and are unitless. Pressures are entered as gauge values and may not be negative. Each
temperature and each pressure entered creates a loading for use when building load cases. Both thermal and pressure data
carries forward from one element to the next until changed. Entering a value in the Hydro Pressure field causes CAESAR II
to build a Hydro case in the set of recommended load cases.
Note: CAESAR II uses an ambient temperature of 70°F, unless changed using the Special Execution Parameters Option.
Special Element Information
Special components such as bends, rigid elements, expansion joints and tees require additional information, which can be
defined by enabling the component and entering data in the auxiliary screen.
If the element described by the spreadsheet ends in a bend, elbow or mitered joint, the Bend check box should be set by
double-clicking. This entry opens up the auxiliary data field on the right hand side of the input screen to accept additional
data regarding the bend. CAESAR II usually assigns three nodes to a bend (giving ‘near’, ‘mid’, and ‘far’ node on the bend).
Double-clicking the Rigid check box (indicating an element that is much stiffer than the connecting pipe such as a flange or
valve) opens an auxiliary data field to collect the component weight. For rigid elements, CAESAR II follows these rules:
• When the rigid element weight is entered, i.e. not zero, CAESAR II computes any extra weight due to insulation and
contained fluid, and adds it to the user-entered weight value.
• The weight of fluid added to a non-zero weight rigid element is equal to the same weight that would be computed for an
equivalent straight pipe. The weight of insulation added is equal to the same weight that would be computed for an
equivalent straight pipe times 1.75.
• If the weight of a rigid element is zero or blank, CAESAR II assumes the element is an artificial “construction element”
rather than an actual piping element, so no insulation or fluid weight is computed for that element.
• The stiffness of the rigid element is relative to the diameter (and wall & thickness) entered. Make sure that the diameter
entered on a rigid element spreadsheet is indicative of the rigid stiffness that should be generated.
If an element is an expansion joint, double-clicking that check box brings up an auxiliary screen, which prompts for
stiffness parameters and effective diameter. Expansion joints may be modeled as zero-length (with all stiffnesses acting at a
single point) or as finite-length (with the stiffnesses acting over a continuous element). In the former case, all stiffness must
be entered, in the latter; either the lateral or angular stiffness must be omitted.
Checking the SIF & Tees check box allows the user to specify any component having special stress intensification factors
(SIF). CAESAR II automatically calculates these factors for each component.
Note: Bends, rigids, and expansion joints are mutually exclusive. Refer to the Valve/flange and Expansion Joint
database discussions later in this chapter for quick entry of rigid element and expansion joint data.
Boundary Conditions
The checkboxes in this block open the auxiliary data field to allow the input of items, which restrain (or impose movement
on) the pipe— restraints, hangers, flexible nozzles or displacements. Though not required, it is recommended that such
information be supplied on the input screen which has that point as the From node or To node. (This will be of benefit if the
data must be located for modification). The auxiliary data fields allow specification of up to 4 restraints (devices which in
some way modify the free motion of the system), one hanger, one nozzle, or two sets of nodal displacements per element. If
needed, additional items for any node can be input on other element screens.
Loading Conditions
The checkboxes in this block allow the user to define loadings acting on the pipe. These loads may be individual forces or
moments acting at discrete points, distributed uniform loads (which may be specified on force per unit length, or
gravitational body forces), or wind loadings (wind loadings are entered by specifying a wind shape factor—the loads
themselves are specified when building the load cases.
The uniform load and the wind shape factor check boxes will be unchecked on subsequent input screens. This does not
mean that the loads were removed from these elements; instead, this implies that the loads do not change on subsequent
screens.
Note: Uniform loads may be specified in g-values by setting a parameter in the Special Execution Options.
5-8 Piping Input
Piping Material
CAESAR II requires the specification of the pipe material’s elastic modulus, Poisson’s ratio, density, and (in most cases)
expansion coefficient. The program provides a database containing the parameters for many common piping materials. This
information is retrieved by picking a material from the drop list, by entering the material number, or by typing the entire
material name and then picking it from the match list. (The coefficient of expansion does not appear on the input screen, but
it can be reviewed during error checking.) Note that materials 18 and 19 represent cold spring properties, cut short and cut
long respectively; material 20 activates CAESAR II’s orthotropic model for use with materials such as fiberglass reinforced
plastic pipe. Material 21 permits a totally user defined material. Using a material with a number greater than 100 permits the
use of allowable stresses from the database.
Material Elastic Properties
This block is used to enter or override the elastic modulus and Poisson’s ratio of the material, if the value in the database is
not correct. These values must be entered for Material type 21 (user specified).
Note: Material properties in the database may be changed permanently using the CAESAR II Material Database editor.
Densities
The densities of the piping material, insulation, and fluid contents are specified in this block. The piping material density is
a required entry and is usually extracted from the Material Database. Fluid density can optionally be entered in terms of
specific gravity, if convenient, by following the input immediately with the letters: SG, e.g. 0.85SG (there can be no spaces
between the number and the SG).
Note: If an insulation thickness is specified (in the pipe section properties block) but no insulation density is entered,
CAESAR II defaults to the density of calcium silicate.
Auxiliary Data Area

The Auxiliary data area is used to display or enter extended data associated with the check box fields.
The data in this area can be displayed by single clicking the appropriate box, or by toggling through the screens with the use
of the [F12] key or by clicking the appropriate tabs.
Note: When there is no auxiliary data, the model status screen appears.
Flanges
This auxiliary screen is used to enter flange information for in-line flange evaluation. The dialog changes to accommodate
input for the two different methods of flange analysis available in CAESAR II.
5-10 Piping Input
Bend Data
This auxiliary screen is used to enter information regarding bend radius, miter cuts, fitting wall thickness, stiffness factor
(K-Factor), or attached flanges.
Intermediate node points may be placed at specified angles along the bend, or at the bend mid-point (“M”).
Rigid Weight
This auxiliary screen is used to enter the weight of a rigid element. If no weight is entered CAESAR II models the element as
a weightless construction element.
Note: Rigid weights are entered automatically if the Valve and Flange database is used.
5-12 Piping Input
Restraints
This auxiliary screen is used to enter data for up to four restraints per spreadsheet. Node number and restraint Type are
required; all other information is optional (omitting the stiffness entry defaults to “rigid”). Restraint types may be selected
from the drop list or typed in.
Note: Skewed restraints may be entered by entering direction cosines with the type, such as X (1,0,1) for a restraint
running at 45º in the X-Z plane.
Expansion Joint
This auxiliary screen is used to enter the expansion joint stiffness parameters and effective diameter. For a non-zero length
expansion joint, either the transverse or bending stiffness must be omitted.
Note: Setting the effective diameter to zero de-activates the pressure thrust load. This method may be used (in
conjunction with setting a large axial stiffness) to simulate the effect of axial tie-rods.
5-14 Piping Input
Displacements
This auxiliary screen is used to enter imposed displacements for up to two nodes per spreadsheet. Up to nine displacement
vectors may be entered (load components D1 through D9). If a displacement value is entered for any vector, this direction is
considered to be fixed for any other non-specified vectors.
Note: Leaving a direction blank for all nine vectors models the system as being free to move in that direction. Specifying
“0.0” implies that the system is fully restrained in that direction.
Forces
This auxiliary screen is used to enter imposed forces and/or moments for up to two nodes per spreadsheet. Up to nine force
vectors may be entered (load components F1 through F9).
5-16 Piping Input
Uniform Loads
This auxiliary screen is used to enter up to three uniform load vectors (load components U1, U2 and U3). These uniform
loads are applied to the entire current element, as well as all subsequent elements in the model, until explicitly changed or
zeroed out with a later entry.
Wind/Wave
This auxiliary screen is used to specify whether this portion of the pipe is exposed to wind or wave loading. (Note that the
pipe may not be exposed to both.) Selecting Wind exposes the pipe to wind loading; selecting Wave exposes the pipe to
wave, current, and buoyancy loadings; selecting Off turns off both types of loading.
This screen is also used to enter the Wind Shape Factor (when Wind is specified) and various wave coefficients (if left
blank they will be program-computed) when Wave Loading is specified.
Entries on this auxiliary screen apply to all subsequent piping, until changed on a later spreadsheet.
Note: Specific wind and wave load cases are built using the Static Load Case Editor.
5-18 Piping Input
Allowable Stresses
This auxiliary screen is used to select the piping code (from a drop list) and to enter any data required for the code check.
Allowable stresses are automatically updated for material, temperature and code if available in the Material Database.
Enter Material Fatigue Curve data by clicking the Fatigue Curve button. A dialog displays where users may enter stress
vs. cycle data with up to 8 points per curve.
Note: IGE/TD/12 requires the entry of five fatigue curves representing fatigue classes D, E, F, G, and W.
The Fatigue Curve data may also be read in from a COADE-supplied or user-created file. Users can access these file by
clicking the Read from Files button on the Fatigue Curve dialog.
Stress Intensification Factors/Tees

5-20 Piping Input
This auxiliary screen is used to enter stress intensification factors, or fitting types for up to two nodes per spreadsheet. If
components are selected from the drop list, CAESAR II automatically calculates the SIF values as per the applicable code
(unless overridden by the user). Certain fittings and certain codes require additional data as shown. Fields are enabled as
appropriate for the selected fitting.
Flexible Nozzles
This auxiliary screen is used to describe flexible nozzle connections. When entered in this way, CAESAR II automatically
calculates the flexibilities and inserts them at this location. CAESAR II calculates nozzle loads according to WRC 297, API
650 or BS 5500 criteria.
Hangers
This auxiliary screen is used to describe hanger installations. Hanger data may be fully completed by the user, or the hanger
may be designed by CAESAR II. In this case, two special load cases are run, the results of which are used as design
parameters which are used to select the springs from the user specified catalog.
Note: CAESAR II provides catalogs for 25 different spring hanger vendors.

5-22 Piping Input
Node Names
Activating this check box allows the user to enter text names for the From and/or To nodes (up to ten characters). These
names display instead of the node numbers on the graphic plots and in the reports (note some of the names may be truncated
when space is not available).
Offsets
This auxiliary screen is used to specify offsets to correct modeled element length and orientation to actual length and
orientation. Offsets may be specified at From and/or To nodes.
5-24 Piping Input
Menu Commands
The CAESAR II Piping Input processor provides many commands, which can be run from the menu, toolbars or
accelerator keys. The menu options are:
File Menu
The File menu is used to perform actions associated with opening, closing and running the job file.
File Menu for the Piping Input Screen
Button and Name Description

Creates a new CAESAR II job. CAESAR II prompts for the name of the new model.
New
Opens an existing CAESAR II job. CAESAR II prompts for the name

Open
Saves the current CAESAR II job under its current name.

Save
Save As Saves the current CAESAR II job under a new name.
Save As Graphic Image Saves the current CAESAR II job as an HTML page, .TIFF, .BMP, or .JPG file.
Allows the user to assign a password to prevent inadvertent alteration of the model or to enter the password to unlock the file.
Archive
Sends the model through interactive error checking. This is the first step of analysis, followed by the building of the static or
Error Check dynamic load cases (see Chapter 6).

Error checks the model in a non-interactive way and halts only for fatal errors; uses the existing or default static load cases, and
Batch Run performs the static analysis). The next step is the output processor.
Allows the user to print out an input listing. CAESAR II prompts the user for the data items to include.
Print
Provides print preview of input listing.

Print Preview
Print Setup Sets up the printer for the input listing.
Recent Piping Files Open a file from the list of most recently used jobs.
5-26 Piping Input
Edit Menu
Edit Menu for the Piping Input

The Edit menu provides commands for cutting and pasting, navigating through the spreadsheets, and performing a few
small utilities. These commands are:

Moves the spreadsheet to the next element in the model, adding a new element if there is no next element.
Continue
Copies the selected element either before or after the current element.
Duplicate
Duplicate Element

Insert Inserts an element either before or after the current element.
Insert Element
5-28 Piping Input

Deletes the current element.
Delete
Allows the user to find an element containing one or more named nodes (if two nodes are entered, the element must contain
both nodes). Enabling the Zoom To check box will display the element if found.
Find
Find Element

Prompts the user to enter global (absolute) coordinates for the first node of any disconnected segments.
Global
Closes a loop by filling in the delta coordinates between two nodes on the spreadsheet.
close Loop
Gives the user the opportunity to change the automatic node increment.
Increment
Calculates the distance between the origin and a node, or between two nodes.
Distance
Presents the input data in an alternative, list format that displays a drop down menu where users can select any list. This
List provides the benefit of showing all of the element data in a context setting. The list format also permits block operations
such as Duplicate, Delete, Copy, Renumber on the element data. For more information on the list input format, see the
Technical Reference Manual.
List Input Format

Skips to the Next Element.
Next Element
Goes to the Previous Element.

Previous Element
Goes to the First Element.

First Element
Goes to the Last Element.

Last Element
Reverses/Cancels any modeling steps done in the CAESAR II Input module one at a time. This can also be accomplished
Undo by using the he Ctrl-Z hot key or selecting Edit/Undo from the Main Menu. An unlimited number of steps (limited only by
amount of available memory) may be undone.
Note that making any input change while in the middle of the "undo stack" of course resets the "redo" stack.
5-30 Piping Input

Repeats the last step. An unlimited number of steps (limited only by amount of available memory) may be undone. Note
Redo that making any input change while in the middle of the "undo stack" of course resets the "redo" stack.
Note that making any input change while in the middle of the "undo stack" of course resets the "redo" stack.
Opens the Static Load Case Editor window. This button is enabled when the job is error checked.
Edit Static Load Case
Opens the Dynamic Load Case Editor window. This button is enabled when the job is error checked.
Edit Dynamic Load Case
Review Current Units Located on the Edit Menu it allows users to review units used to create the report file. Changing units in the configuration
file will not affect the input. To change Input units from the Main Menu use Tools-Convert Input to New Units.
Model Menu
The Model menu contains modeling aids, as well as means for entering associated, system-wide information.
Model Menu

Allows the user to break the element into two unequal length elements or into many equal length elements. A single node
Break may be placed as a break point anywhere along the element, or multiple nodes may be placed at equal intervals (the node
step interval between the FROM and TO nodes determines the number of nodes placed).
Break
Break Element
5-32 Piping Input
Note: Restraint configurations may be automatically copied from any other node in the system to the new nodes.

Allows the user to model a valve or flange from one of the CAESAR II databases. Choosing a combination of Rigid
Valve Type, End Type, and Class constructs a rigid element with the length and weight extracted from the database.
Valve and Flange Database
Note: Selecting FLG in the CADWORX database adds the length and weight of two flanges (and two gaskets) into the
selected valve.

Activates the Expansion Joint Modeler. The modeler automatically builds a complete assembly of the selected
Expansion Joints expansion joint style, using the bellows stiffnesses and rigid element weights extracted from one of the vendors’
expansion joint catalogs.
Expansion Joints
5-34 Piping Input

Allows the user to enter a job title up to sixty lines long.
Title
Title

Prompts the user for system - wide hanger design criteria.
Hanger Design Control Data
Hanger Design Control Data
Note: System-wide hanger design criteria is used for all hanger designs, unless overruled at specific hanger locations.
5-36 Piping Input
Environment Menu
The Environment menu provides some miscellaneous items.
Environment Menu

Allows the user to run “what if” tests on the Stress Intensification Factors of intersections.
Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes
Allows the user to run “what if” tests on the Stress Intensification Factors of selected bends.
Review SIFs at Bend Nodes

Allows the user to set options affecting the analysis of the current job. Items covered include ambient
Special Execution Parameters temperature, pressure stiffening, displacements due to pressure (Bourdon effect), Z-axis orientation, etc.
Special Execution Parameters

Include Piping Input Files Allows the user to include other piping models in the current model.
Include Piping Files

5-38 Piping Input
The same file may be included more than once by highlighting it in the list, then changing the rotation angle (ROTY) or
nodal increment (Inc) before clicking Add.

Include Structural Input Files Allows the incorporation of structural models into the piping model.
Include Structural Files

Show Informational Messages Allows the user to specify whether or not you receive information messages when CAESAR II converts nominal
diameter and thicknesses to actual diameter and thicknesses.
Reset View or Refresh Allows users to control the way graphics behave when adding new or modifying existing elements.
Opens the configuration file for review and editing.

CAESAR II Configuration
Option and View menu choices list graphic controls and manipulation commands.
3-D Modeler
Start CAESAR II and launch the Piping Input Processor. Once in the input, the graphic automatically plots and displays to the
right of the Classic Piping Input window. To increase the window space available for graphics the Classic Piping Input
window may be hidden from view on the side panel by clicking the thumbtack. The initial view for a job never plotted
before is displayed according to the configuration defaults that include:
• A rendered view- restraints shown

• XYZ compass - isometric view
• Tees and nozzles highlighted- orthographic projection
The plotting begins by displaying the model in centerline/single line mode to speedup the process. Then all the elements get
changed to their intended state (they are rendered one by one). Later, the restraints and other relevant items are added.
Note: The model is fully operational while actually being drawn. Users may apply any available option to the model at
any time. The status bar at the bottom of the view window displays the drawing progress in the form of Drawing element X
of Y. When the plot operation is complete, the status bar message changes to Ready.
5-40 Piping Input
When the mouse cursor hovers over the buttons the button's name displays, and a short description of the button’s
functionality displays in the status bar at the bottom of the view window.
There are several methods of accomplishing nearly every command in the Input Plot Utility. Commands may be accessed
by clicking buttons, selecting drop-down menu items, or through the use of hot keys.

Users may wish to verify model data in single line mode; this often makes the view clearer, click this button. Note that
Center Line View in this mode, restraints and other element information items still display. A Volume or double line plot can be
obtained by clicking the corresponding button. Also, pressing the V key on the keyboard will switch the views in the
following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line Mode / Center Line View.
Users may wish to verify model data in single line mode; this often makes the view clearer, click the Center Line
Shaded View View button. Note that in this mode, restraints and other element information items still display. A Volume or double
line plot can be obtained by clicking the corresponding button. Also, pressing the V key on the keyboard will switch
the views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line Mode / Center Line View.
Silhouette View button. Note that in this mode, restraints and other element information items still display. A Volume or double
Hidden Line Wire Frame View button. Note that in this mode, restraints and other element information items still display. A Volume or double
Wire Frame View button. Note that in this mode, restraints and other element information items still display. A Volume or double
Translucent View button. Note that in this mode, restraints and other element information items still display. A Volume or double
Various orthogonal views can be obtained by clicking the appropriate button, Front/Back/Top Bottom/ Left/Right.
Front Alternatively, using the X, Y, or Z keys on the keyboard will set the model in right, top, or front views respectively.
Additionally, holding down the SHIFT key while pressing X, Y, or Z keys will show left, bottom, or back views
respectively. This option is useful to see the model just like it would be seen on a CAD drawing.
Various orthogonal views can be obtained by clicking the appropriate button, Front/Back/Top/ Bottom/ Left/Right.
Back Alternatively, using the X, Y, or Z keys on the keyboard will set the model in right, top, or front views respectively.
Various orthogonal views can be obtained by clicking the appropriate button, Front/Back/Top/Bottom Left/Right.
Top Alternatively, using the X, Y, or Z keys on the keyboard will set the model in right, top, or front views respectively.
Various orthogonal views can be obtained by clicking the appropriate button, Front/Back/Top/Bottom/Left/ Right.
Bottom Alternatively, using the X, Y, or Z keys on the keyboard will set the model in right, top, or front views respectively.
Left Alternatively, using the X, Y, or Z keys on the keyboard will set the model in right, top, or front views respectively.

Right Alternatively, using the X, Y, or Z keys on the keyboard will set the model in right, top, or front views respectively.
Displays an isometric view this option may be activated by pressing the F10 key on the keyboard.
ISO View
Displays Node numbers by clicking the Node Numbers button, by pressing the N key on or by clicking OPTIONS/NODE
Node Numbers NUMBERS from then menu. Users can also opt to display node numbers for a specific element i.e., only restraints or only
anchors.
Displays element lengths by clicking the Show Lengths button or by pressing the L key on the keyboard. Alternatively,
Show Length the same functionality can be achieved from the menu by clicking OPTIONS/LENGTHS. This will display the elements
lengths to verify the input.
Select Element and using the mouse to hover over the model produces a bubble displaying relevant information for the
Select Element desired element. For more information refer to the 3D Graphics Highlights: Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads,
Wind/Wave Loads section later in this chapter.
Select Group and using the mouse to hover over the model produces a bubble displaying relevant information for the
Select Group desired group of elements. For more information refer to the 3D Graphics Highlights: Displacements, Forces, Uniform
Loads, Wind/Wave Loads section later in this chapter.
The transition from one orthogonal view to another is a smooth transition. It is possible to make a sudden change/jump
Perspective by pressing a combination of the CTRL + ALT + F5 keys before changing the view with one of the described options.
The sudden jump option is useful for relatively large models as it speeds up the viewing process.
The transition from one orthogonal view to another is a smooth transition. It is possible to make a sudden change/jump
Orthographic by pressing a combination of the CTRL + ALT + F5 keys before changing the view with one of the described options.
The sudden jump option is useful for relatively large models as it speeds up the viewing process.
Note: For a clearer view, nodes, restraints, hangers, and anchors can be turned off. The boundary condition symbols (like
restraints, anchors, and hangers} size is relative to the pipe size OD. In addition the symbol (i.e., restraints and/or hangers)
size may be changed manually by clicking the black arrow to the right of the relevant button and selecting the Size option
from the drop down menu.
5-42 Piping Input
Users can adjust the color of the node numbers, lengths, elements, boundary conditions, etc. by clicking the Change
Display Options button, for more information refer to the 3D Graphics Configuration section later in this chapter.
The model can be panned using the mouse, by activating the Pan button. After clicking the button, the cursor changes to a
hand; and the view may be panned by moving the mouse while holding down the left mouse button. The view may also be
panned from under any other command by holding down the middle mouse button/mouse wheel while moving the mouse
(when applicable).

All the highlighting and zoom/rotate effects on the model as well as other effects may be reset at once by clicking this
Reset Plot button. The model returns to its default state as defined by the configuration; any elements hidden by the Range
command are restored, for more information refer to the Range section for details.
The model can be zoomed by clicking the Zoom button, and moving the mouse up or down while depressing the left
Zoom mouse button. Releasing the mouse button halts the zoom. Note that while in the zoom mode, the keyboard + and - keys
may be used to zoom the model in and out. Alternatively, the model may also be zoomed from under any other
command or mode by rotating the mouse wheel when applicable. The best way to zoom to a particular area of the model
is to use the mouse to draw a rubber band box around the desired area.
Simply click the Zoom to Window button, then left-click one corner of the desired area, and stretch a box diagonally to
Zoom to Window the opposite corner of the area while still holding the left mouse button down. When the left button is released, the model
zooms to the selected area.
Note that while in the zoom mode, the keyboard + and - keys may be used to zoom the model in and out. Alternatively,
the model may also be zoomed from under any other command or mode by rotating the mouse wheel when applicable.
The best way to zoom to a particular area of the model is to use the mouse to draw a rubber band box around the desired
area.
To see a specific element on the model on the screen click this button.
Zoom to Selection
To see the entire model on the screen, click the Zoom to Extents button. Note that while in the zoom mode, the
Zoom to Extents keyboard + and - keys may be used to zoom the model in and out. Alternatively, the model may also be zoomed from
under any other command or mode by rotating the mouse wheel when applicable. The best way to zoom to a particular
area of the model is to use the mouse to draw a rubber band box around the desired area.
Interactive rotation of the model can be accomplished by clicking the Orbit button. Once this mode is activated, rotate
Orbit the model by using the mouse or the arrow keys on the keyboard. To use a mouse for rotating the model, click the left
mouse button on the model (the bounding box will be drawn to outline the model boundaries; while holding down the left
mouse button, move the mouse around to the desired position. When the mouse button is released, the view is updated
and the bounding box disappears. If the bounding box is not visible, check the corresponding box on the User Options
tab of the Plot Configuration dialog for more information refer to the 3D Graphics Configuration section for details.
Note, during rotation operation (only for speedup purposes) the model may be changed to the centerline/ single line mode
view or some of the geometry details may disappear or become distorted. The actual conversion will depend on the size
and complexity of the model. Once the rotation is complete, the model returns to its original state.
Another method of orbiting the model is the Gyro operator. Activate this feature by pressing the G key. After pressing
the G key, the model performs a full 360-degree rotation in the plane of view.
Holding the mouse wheel down and moving the mouse up, down, left, or right, provides the panning effects of riding the
Pan elevator up/down or stepping to the side, similar to using the keyboard keys Q, Z, A, or D. The mouse cursor will change
to a hand icon.
Enables users to explore the scene of the model with a setup similar to a virtual reality application. It produces the effect
Walk Through of walking towards the model
Displays the model in CADWorx.

Load CADWorx Model
3D Graphics Configuration
The CAESAR II 3D Graphics engine remembers the state of the model between sessions. Exiting the input completely and
then returning to the input graphics results in the model being displayed in the same state in which it was last viewed.
To obtain a more uniform look of graphics users may change the color and font options under TOOLS/CONFIGURE/SETUP/3D
VIEWER SETTINGS. Check the Always Use System Fonts and Always Use System Colors boxes located under the Default
Visual Settings section. These settings will then be stored in the computer's registry and CAESAR II will always display the
graphics according to these settings.
5-44 Piping Input
If the check boxes described above are unchecked then the state of each model is maintained individually (job related), as an
XML data file (jobname.XML) in the current data directory. After launching another input session, CAESAR II reads this
XML file and restores the 3D graphics to its previous state. This includes the rotation and zoom level of the model; color
settings, data display, and the current graphics operator.
Most of the display options can be adjusted by clicking the Change button. The tabs of the Plot Configuration dialog
control include: basic graphics colors, font selection and size for textural data, user startup settings, and visibility (the
degree of transparency.
Option Description
Colors Selecting any item in the list, then clicking Change, displays a Windows color selection tool. Selecting the desired color
and clicking OK changes the color of the selected item to the new color. The rotating spring hanger is used to actively
view the color selection combinations before altering the entire plot window. Use this tool to prevent selecting
unsatisfactory color combinations. Colors may be reset to CAESAR II defaults, as defined in configuration, by clicking
Reset All.
Fonts Selecting any item in the list, then clicking Change, displays the standard Windows™ font selection tool. Making the
desired changes and clicking OK updates the selected item. Similar to the Colors tab, the relative size, color, as well as
the font face of the selected text item can be previewed in the Font Sample window of the Fonts tab before changing the
entire model.
5-46 Piping Input
User Options
Specifies the initial display configuration when plotting a model in an input session. The 3D Graphics can be configured (on
an individual job basis) to restart in a specific manner. The graphics can start with a preset operator active (such as zoom
with mouse), or start with the last operator used still active. Likewise, the graphics can start in a preset view (such as
isometric), or in the last rotated zoomed position.
Option Description
Bounding Box Determines if rotations, via the mouse, includes an outline box surrounding the model.
Hide Overlapped Text Prevents text from appearing on top of other text items thereby producing a distortion.
Restore Last Operator Determines whether the graphics engine remembers your last action (operator) between sessions or always defaults to a
specified action (operator) on startup. Disabling the check box activates the Operator Selection radio buttons.
Restore Previous View Determines whether the graphics engine remembers the last displayed view of the model, or defaults to a specified view.
Disabling the check box activates the Initial View radio buttons.
Initial View
Default Projection Determines the initial projection style of the model. CAESAR II Graphics automatically default to orthographic
projection.
Option Description
Visibility Alters the degree of transparency, when translucent pipe is activated. When the Translucent Objects button is enabled,
it allows viewing through the pipe. This is especially useful for viewing jacketed piping or piping inside of vessels.
Moving the slider to the right increases the degree of visibility, making it easier to see through the pipe elements.
Note: The Visibility option is only effective when viewing the model in rendered mode, and can be activated by clicking
the Translucent Objects button.
5-48 Piping Input
Option Description
Markers Displays a symbol denoting the element’s end points.
Note: Clicking OK on the Plot Configuration dialog saves all changes made to any tab and modifies the model’s view.
Clicking Cancel will disregard all changes made.
HOOPS Toolbar Manipulations

HOOPS Graphics also provides the ability to adjust the graphics toolbar for the purpose of rearranging or removing buttons.
There are two methods to make these adjustments, the first method is to right click on the toolbar and click Customize. The
second method involves removing or repositioning the button using the drag and drop method.
To remove buttons from the toolbar click the down arrow located at the end of each toolbar and then click Remove. To add
button removed from the toolbar by clicking the down arrow and clicking Add. To rearrange buttons select them, one at a
time, while pressing the ALT key and then drag it to the desired location. To restore the CAESAR II default toolbar
configuration, click the Reset button.
In addition to the use of the Customize button, individual buttons can be removed or repositioned by pressing the ALT key,
and dragging the desired button. To remove a button, drag it off the graphics window, using the left mouse button. To
reposition a button, drag it to the desired location, using the left mouse button. When the mouse button is released, the
button will be placed on the toolbar at the selected location.
Multiple View Ports
The 3D/HOOPS Graphics module provides up to 4 views, which can be sized, rotated, and annotated individually by the
user. To control the splitter handle, click the Four Views button. It automatically places the horizontal and vertical dividers
(splitter bars on the screen, and changes the mouse cursor to a four-way arrow icon. The user may change the position of the
splitter bars (and correspondingly the relative size of the views by moving the mouse around. After finding the desired
location, click the left mouse button once to fix the position.
The vertical and horizontal splitter bars can also be dragged or resized individually: after hovering the mouse over a splitter
bar, the mouse cursor will change to vertical or horizontal resize correspondingly. For example, to change the position of
the vertical split bar, using the left mouse button, grab the splitter bar and drag it to the right. When the mouse button is
released, all the panes are updated. If the splitter bar is dragged to the view frame border, it disappears, and the number of
views is decreased in half. This is true for both the horizontal and vertical splitter bars. When the last splitter bar is dragged
away to the view frame border, the single view is left. It is also possible to drag from the intersection of the horizontal and
vertical dividers to any corner of the view to eliminate 3 views at once.
Another way to divide the view into two or four independent views is to drag the splitter located at the top or left scroll bars
with the mouse. Notice the two splitter bars at the graphics processor window, one is at the far left of the horizontal scroll
bar, and the other is at the very top of the vertical scroll bar. Using the left mouse button, grab the lower left splitter bar and
drag it to the right. The graphics window splits into two panes, left and right. When the mouse button is released, both panes
are updated. Again using the left mouse button, grab the upper right splitter bar and drag it down. The two existing panes
split into two additional panes, upper and lower. When the mouse button is released, all four panes are updated, with the X
axis view in the upper left pane, the Y axis view in the upper right pane, the Z axis view in the lower left pane, and a
isometric (or original) view in the lower right pane.
The screen captures above displays 4 panes in view and the state of the graphics engine when the horizontal split bar is
removed leaving 2 panes in view.
Note: The image in any of these panes can be manipulated individually. Each pane can be rotated, panned, or zoomed
independently of the other panes.
5-50 Piping Input
3D Graphic Highlights - Materials, Diameters, Wall Thickness, Insulation

Often it is necessary to review the piping model in the context of certain data, for example, by diameter, wall thickness,
temperature, or pressure. These operations are illustrated below.
Button Description
When Diameters is clicked, the display updates to show each diameter in a different color. A color key (legend) is included
Diameters at the bottom of the plot in its own pane. This option can be used to quickly see the diameter variations throughout the
system. This is a good way to verify that diameter changes have been made where appropriate. The same functionality may
be achieved from the Options menu by selecting the Diameters menu options. Alternatively, the user may use the D- key to
view different diameters.
Produces results similar to the ones described in the Diameters section, the model is colored according to the different data
Insulation defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left.
The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting Insulation menu options. Alternatively, the
user may use the corresponding user may use the I- key to view the insulation.
Wall Thickness defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left.
The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting Wall Thickness, menu option. Alternatively,
the user may use the corresponding user may use the W- key to view the different wall thicknesses throughout the model.
Materials defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left.
The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting Materials menu option. Alternatively, the
user may use the M - key to view different materials.
Note: The legend window may be resized, docked, and/or removed from view.
Note: While in the described highlighted mode, the model can still be zoomed, panned and rotated. Any of orthographic
projections and single line/volume modes can be used without affecting the model highlighted state.
Note: Clicking the same button twice will deactivate the coloring effect.
Note: The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting Materials, Diameters, Wall
Thickness, or Insulation menu options. Alternatively, the user may use the corresponding keyboard keys: M - to view
different materials, D - to view different diameters, W - to view different wall thickness throughout the model, and I - to
view the insulation.
Note: When the model is being printed using FILE MENU/ PRINT while in one of the highlighted modes described herein, the
color key legend will appear in the upper left corner of the page. This is always true, even if the actual legend window has
been dragged away from the view.
3D Graphics Highlights: Temperature and Pressure

Highlight the pipe elements for a particular temperature vector in a different color. A color key (legend) is included on the
Temperatures left side of the plot in a separate window. This option can be used to quickly see temperature variations throughout the
system. This is a good way to verify that temperature changes have been made where appropriate. When more than one
operating temperature has been specified, a drop list is presented so that the single desired temperature vector can be used in
coloring the model.
Clicking the Pressure button produces results similar to the ones described in the Temperature section, the model is colored
Pressure according to the different data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left . When more than one operating
pressure has been defined, a drop list with up to 9 pressures and a hydro pressure, HYD, as defined choices appears.
Note: Only the pressures and temperatures that were actually defined in the input will appear in the toolbar as a choice.
Note: The legend window may be resized, docked, and/or dragged away from the view.
projections and single line/volume modes can still be used without affecting the model highlighted state.
Note: Clicking the same button twice will deactivate the coloring effect.
Note: The same functionality may be achieved from the Options Menu by selecting the Temperatures or Pressures
menu options. Alternatively, the Temperatures can be accessed by pressing keyboard number buttons 1 through 9.
Note: When the model is being printed using FILE MENU/ PRINT while in one of the highlighted modes described herein, the
color key legend displays in the upper left corner of the page. This is always true, even if the actual legend window has been
dragged away from the view.

Highlights the pipe elements of a particular value of corrosion allowance in one color. A legend is included for
Corrosion Allowance identification of different corrosion allowances.
Highlights the pipe densities through the model in a color-coded fashion and includes a legend.
Pipe Density
Highlights the different fluid densities through the model in a color-coded fashion and includes a legend.
Fluid Density
Highlights the different insulation densities through the model in a color-coded fashion and includes a legend.
Insulation Density
5-52 Piping Input
3D Graphics Highlights: Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, Wind/Wave Loads

The 3D/HOOPS Graphics engine can display applied/predefined displacements, forces, uniform loads, or wind/wave loads
in a tabular format. The display windows can be scrolled vertically and or horizontally to view all node points where data
has been defined. To flip through the defined displacement or force vectors 1 through 9, use the Next and Previous buttons
at the bottom of the tabular legend window. The color key at the far left of the window assists in locating the node points on
the model (when the model geometry is complex).
Note that the displacements window shows the user specified values as well as free or fixed Degrees of Freedom (DOF). In
this case, a DOF is free if a displacement value is not specified in any of the displacement load vectors. Note also that if a
certain DOF has a specified displacement in at least one of the load vectors, then it is fixed in all other load vectors.

The 3D/HOOPS Graphics can display applied/predefined displacements and /or forces in a tabular format.
Forces
The display windows can be scrolled vertically and or horizontally to view all node points where data has been defined.
To flip through the defined displacement or force vectors 1 through 9, use the Next and Previous buttons at the bottom
of the tabular legend window. The color key at the far left of the window assists in locating the node points on the model
(when the model geometry is complex).
Forces behave similar to the Displacements option, the model elements are highlighted for a particular force vector, and
the color key legend grid window displays on the left. The node number in combination with a color key specifies the
location where the force and moment values are defined. Clicking the same button twice will deactivate the coloring
effect.
The 3D/HOOPS Graphics can display uniform loads in a tabular format.

Uniform Loads
Uniform Loads has three vectors defined. The Node column represents the start node number where the uniform loads
vector was first defined. Since the data propagates throughout the model until changed or disabled, the model is colored
accordingly. Clicking the same button twice will deactivate the coloring effect.
The 3D/HOOPS Graphics can display wind/wave loads in a tabular format. Wind/Wave also displays the loading
Wind/Wave coefficients.
The color key is defined as follows: all the elements with wind defined are colored in red color; all the elements with
wave data defined are colored in green color. The legend grid shows the relevant data items defined by the user. Clicking
the same button twice will deactivate the coloring effect.
Note: The legend window may be resized, docked and/or removed from the view.
projections and single line/volume modes can still be used without affecting the model highlighted state.
Note: The same functionality may be achieved from the Options Menu by selecting the relevant options. Alternatively,
users can access Predefined Displacements by pressing F3 on the keyboard. Forces/moment vectors can be accessed by
pressing F5 on the keyboard.
Note: When the model is being printed using FILE MENU/PRINT while in one of the highlighted modes described herein, the
color key legend appears on the second page following the model bitmap image. The printed legend is presented in the
tabular form similar to the legend window.
Select Element allows users to obtain element data. When enabled, hovering over a pipe element with the mouse
shows a bubble with the element's nodes, delta dimensions, and pipe size data. Clicking on an element highlights the
element and updates the information on the spreadsheet. Clicking a different element highlights the relevant element and
changes the data in the spreadsheet accordingly.
Note: Clicking the empty space of the graphics view de-highlights the element. The spreadsheet will still contain the
information from the last element selected.
Limiting the Amount of Displayed Info; Find Node, Range & Cutting Plane
Sometimes it is necessary to limit the amount of displayed information on the screen. This may be useful when the model is
large, or if it has many similar looking branches. There are several ways to achieve this result by clicking the Find Node ,
Range, or Cutting Plane button. The description of these operations, their advantages and disadvantages are illustrated
below.

Allows redlining based on the user moving the mouse. Find Node is useful when a specific node or an element
FInd Node needs to be located. Clicking Find Node displays a dialog prompting for the FROM and TO nodes to search
for. The node numbers can be entered in either of the two fields, or in both. Entering only the FROM node
number causes the feature to search for the first available element that starts with the specified node number.
Entering only the TO node number causes the feature to search for an element ending with the specified node
number. When the element is located, it is highlighted, and the view zooms to the element. Users may zoom out
to better identify the location of the highlighted element within the model.
Allows redlining using a rectangular shape. This option is also useful when trying to emphasize a specific
Create Cutting Plane element. In many cases, the elements/node numbers are not defined consecutively. Thus, it may be easier to cut
a portion of the model at a certain location to see more details.
For this operation, use the Create Cutting Plane button. When the cutting plane appears, use the handles to
move and or rotate the plane as desired. If cutting the plane's handles are not visible, or the display goes blank,
the view may be focused too close for the plane to operate correctly. Use the Zoom button to zoom out; then
click the Cutting Plane button again for the handles to appear. To disable the cutting plane and return to view
click on the display with the right mouse button.
Note the Create Cutting Plane option can be used along any of the three axes.
Allows redlining using a circular shape. This option is useful when trying to emphasize a specific element. To
Create Cutting Plane Horizontally disable the cutting plane and return to view click on the display with the right mouse button.
Note the Create Cutting Plane option can be used along any of the three axes.
Allows the user to enter text and place it anywhere in the plot area. To disable the cutting plane and return to
Create Cutting Plane Vertically view click on the display with the right mouse button.
Note the Create Cutting Plane options can be used along any of the three axes.
Range plots only those elements that contain nodes within the range specified by the user. This is particularly helpful when
attempting to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a rather large, often symmetrical model. Click the
Range button or press the U key to display the Range dialog.
5-54 Piping Input
A sorted list of all defined node numbers with corresponding check marks appears. Clicking a check box next to a particular
node number will enable or disable it.
Note: Only elements with check marks on will display when OK is clicked. If the Range option was previously used,
consecutive clicks will display the dialog with the current state of the shown/hidden elements and the corresponding check
marks.
Range enables the selection and dragging of consecutive node numbers (click the left mouse button on the first node of the
desired selection, then move the mouse while holding the mouse button down, and release the button at the last node of the
desired selection). Alternatively, users may click the first node, press the SHIFT key and click the last node of the selection
using the mouse button. Clicking the check mark with the rectangle once toggles the status that is applied to the entire
highlighted selection.
Use the FROM and TO fields together with the Add button to specify and/or add to the range of elements that are already
selected. If only the FROM node is specified and Add is clicked, all elements (from this node and up will be selected).
Clicking the Reverse Selection button toggles the check marks for the elements to show: it displays the previously hidden
elements, and hides the previously displayed elements. When Clear All is enabled, none of the elements are selected (and
the graphics view appears blank). Use this button to clear the selection.
Note, if none of the elements are selected, and OK is clicked, the view becomes blank. To show the entire model, click the
Select All button.
Note: Using the Range option affects the display and operation of other 3D Graphics Highlighting options. For example,
if part of the model is not visible because of the use of the Range option, then clicking the Show Diameters option will
only highlight the elements that are actually visible. Also if using the Range option hides any nodes containing the
predefined displacements, the Displacements legend grid still appears, but the model may not be properly highlighted.
Note: Find Node may not work properly for the part of the model that is hidden by the Range. The corresponding
message will also appear in the status bar.
Save an Image for Later Presentation: TIF, HTML, BMP, JPEG and PDF
Occasionally, it is necessary to add a graphical representation of a model to the CAESAR II Stress reports. The
3D/HOOPS Graphics view can be saved as a bitmap by clicking FILE/ SAVE AS GRAPHICS IMAGE. The model geometry, colors,
highlighting, as well as restraints and most of the other options will be transferred to the bitmap. After clicking Save As
Graphics Image the Save Image dialog appears asking the user to specify the desired file name and a directory for the file
to be saved. The default bitmap file name is the job name with an extension .TIF. (This is a standard, Windows supported
image file extension that can be opened for viewing.) The image resolution can also be changed in the Save Image dialog.
Note: This is a static bitmap file.
Due to certain limitations of the 3D/HOOPS modeler, the legend window and text cannot be saved to the bitmap. However,
all coloring, as well as the annotations and markups are successfully saved.
Users now have the option to save the graphics as .HTML file. After saving as .HTML CAESAR II creates two files in the
current data directory using the current job name: *.HTML and *.HSF. Opening the .HTML file should display the
corresponding .HSF file.
Note this is an interactive file.
The first time a CAESAR II created .HTML file is opened with an Internet browser, the user receives a message asking to
download a control from Tech Soft 3D. Answer Yes to allow the download, and the image will be displayed. Once the
model appears, selecting and right-clicking the model shows the available viewing options, such as orbit, pan, zoom,
different render modes, etc. The image can be printed or copied to the clipboard as necessary.
Note: Internet Explorer (IE) version 5.0 and earlier may not display the image properly, COADE recommends IE6 or later.

Used to highlight a problem area, or write a brief description of the model. The annotation may be especially
Annotations useful in the output processor for more information refer to the discussion at the end of this section.
The CAESAR II 3D/HOOPS Graphics processor provides several types of annotation as discussed below.
When the Annotate Model button is clicked, the annotation text box with a leader line to an element is added to the
graphics view. To add the annotation, click with the left mouse button on a particular element to start the leader line, while
holding the mouse button down drag the leader line to the annotation point, then type in the annotation text, and then press
the Enter key.
Note: The annotation text box is only a single line.
Note: Annotation with leader stays with the model on zoom, pan, rotate, and use of any highlight options. Annotation also
gets printed to the printer and saved to the bitmap. Annotations are not saved to the HTML file.
Note: The color and font face/size of the annotation text can be changed by clicking Change Display Options, for more
information refer to the 3D Graphics Configuration section in this chapter.
Other annotation options are listed below:

Allows redlining based on the user moving the mouse.
Freehand Markup Operator
Allows redlining using a rectangular shape. This option is useful when trying to emphasize a specific element
Rectangle Markup
Allows redlining using a circular shape. This option is useful when trying to emphasize a specific element
Circle Markup
Allows the user to enter text and place it anywhere in the plot area.
Annotate Operator
It may be used to add a short description of the model to the graphics image for printing or saving as a bitmap.
Note: This markup annotation text box is only a single line. The color and the font face/size cannot be changed the default
color is red.
Note: Markup annotations are saved to the .TIF file and spooled to the printer.
Note: The geometry and the text of the markup annotations are temporary; they are not saved with the model, and
disappear from view with any change like zoom, rotate, pan or reset all.
5-56 Piping Input
3D Graphics Interactive Feature: Walk Through

CAESAR II enables users to explore the scene of the model with a setup similar to a virtual reality application. It produces the
effect of walking towards the model; and once close to or inside the model users can look left, right, up, and down, step to a
side, or ride an elevator up and down. Click Walk Through , to enables this feature. After clicking Walk Through
the mouse’s cursor displays as a pair of feet.
In order for Walk Through to operate properly, the model must be in one of the orthogonal views (such as front, back, left,
or right), and in the perspective projection. This is a limitation of the graphics engine's camera, with regard to lighting
relative positions, derived from the assumption that it is not possible (in real life to walk vertically (for example, from the
top of the model down.
Left Mouse Button Down

• Look Around: Clicking the left mouse button and moving the mouse up, down, left, or right, provides the effect of looking
around. This option is useful when model is close to the viewer, or the viewer is inside the model
Wheel Scroll
• Scrolling the mouse wheel provides the effect of looking up and/or down at a model.
Wheel Down
• Pan: Holding the mouse wheel down and moving the mouse up, down, left, or right, provides the panning effects of riding
the elevator up/down or stepping to the side, similar to using the keyboard keys Q, Z, A, or D. The mouse cursor will
change to a hand icon.
Walk is useful in providing a real-time interactive view of the model. To exit from this option, click any other operator.
• Troubleshooting: While walking it is not possible to look back at the model you need to use the back orthogonal view of
the model as a starting point for walking or walk from the top. If any of these limitations are accidentally met, the camera
versus lighting position will become undefined, and the view may get corrupted. To correct the problem, close the Graphics
Processor window. Locate the *.XML file (the current state of the model is maintained there) by opening Windows
Explorer, navigating to the open the data directory (where the CAESAR II Input file in question is located. Next, find the
XML data file (job-name.XML) and delete it. Then return to the piping input. After starting the 3D Graphics engine, the
model will display in the CAESAR II default state for more information refer to the discussion at the beginning of the
document.
CH AP TER 6
Chapter 6 Error Checking Static Load Cases
In This Chapter
Error Checking ........................................................................................ 6-2
Building Static Load Cases...................................................................... 6-8
Providing Wind Data ............................................................................... 6-9
Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters .................................................... 6-11
Execution of Static Analysis.................................................................... 6-12
Notes on CAESAR II Load Cases ........................................................... 6-15
6-2 Error Checking Static Load Cases
Error Checking
Static analysis cannot be performed until the error checking portion of the piping preprocessor has been successfully
completed. Only after error checking is completed are the required analysis data files created. Similarly, any subsequent
changes made to the model input are not reflected in the analysis unless error checking is rerun after those changes have
been made. CAESAR II does not allow an analysis to take place if the input has been changed and not successfully error
checked.
Button Description
Error Checking can only be done from the input spreadsheet, and is initiated by executing the Error Check or Batch
Error Check Run commands from the toolbar or menu. Error Check saves the input and starts the error checking procedure.
Batch Run causes the program to check the input data, analyze the system, and present the results without any user interaction.
Batch Run The assumptions are that the loading cases to be analyzed do not need to change and that the default account number (if
accounting active) is correct. These criteria are usually met after the first pass through the analysis. Batch processing focuses
the user’s attention on the creation of input and the review of output by expediting the steps in between.
Once launched, the Error Checker reviews the CAESAR II model and alerts users to any possible errors, inconsistencies,
or noteworthy items. These items display to users as Errors, Warnings, or Notes in a grid. The total number of errors,
warnings, or notes displays in corresponding text fields above the Message Grid. Users may sort messages in the Message
Grid by type, message number or element/node number by double-clicking the corresponding column header. Users can
also print messages displayed in the Message Grid by clicking FILE/PRINT.
Fatal Error Message

Errors are flagged when there is a problem with the model due to which analysis cannot continue. An example of this would
be if no length were defined for a piping element. These errors are also called fatal errors, since they are fatal to the analysis,
and must be corrected before continuing.
Clicking on the error message will move the spreadsheet display to the offending element. Users can change the view
between the spreadsheet and error warning views using the tabs located at the bottom of the window.
.
Warning Message
Warnings are flagged whenever there is a problem with a model, which can be overcome using some assumptions. An
example of this would be if an element’s wall thickness were insufficient to meet the minimum wall thickness for the given
pressure (hoop stress). Warnings need not be corrected in order to get a successful analysis, but users should review all
warnings carefully as they are displayed.
Note Message
The third category of alert is the informational note. These messages simply inform the user of some noteworthy fact related
to the model. An example of a note may be a message informing the user of the number of hangers to be designed by
CAESAR II. For notes, there is nothing for the user to “correct.”
The first step in the analysis of an error-checked piping model is the specification of the static load cases.
Button Description
Selection of the Analysis-Static option from the CAESAR II Main Menu or from within the piping input.
Analysis Statics
Note: The piping input file must have successfully gone through error checking before this option can be chosen.
A discussion of CAESAR II Load Cases is included at the end of this chapter. Please refer to the section for or
information.
After entering the static load case editor, a screen appears which lists all of the available loads that are defined in the input,
the available stress types, and the current load cases offered for analysis. If the job is entering static analysis for the first
time, CAESAR II presents a list of recommended load cases. If the job has been run previously, the loads shown are those
saved during the last session. A typical Load Case Editor screen is shown below:
Load Case Editor

The user can define up to ninety-nine load cases. Load cases may be edited by clicking on a line in the Load List area.
Only the load components listed in the upper left-hand portion of the screen may be specified in the load cases. The entries
must be identical to what is shown on the screen. Available stress types can be selected from the Stress Type drop box.
Stress type determines the stress calculation method and the allowable stress to use (if any).
Load Cases may be built through drag and drop actions. Dragging a load component from the Loads Defined in Input list
to a line on the load list automatically adds the load component to the load case, if it is not already included. Highlighted
basic load cases may be dragged down to be added to algebraic combination cases (CAESAR II may prompt for combination
type). Use the Load Case Options tab to select combination methods and other specifics pertaining to the load cases.
Note: Defining a fatigue (FAT) stress type for a load case automatically displays a field in which the number of
anticipated load cycles for that load case can be entered.
All basic (non-combination) load sets must all be specified before any algebraic combinations may be declared. This rule
holds true for user defined and edited load cases.
The following commands are available on this screen:
Button Description
Inserts a blank load case following the currently selected line in the load list. If no line is selected, the load case is
Edit-Insert added at the end of the list. Load cases are selected by clicking on the number to the left of the load case.
Deletes the currently selected load case.

Edit-Delete
Accepts the load cases and runs the job.

File Analysis
Allows the user to replace the current load cases with the CAESAR II recommended load cases.
Recommend
Hides or displays the Load Cycles field in the Load Case list. Entries in these fields are only valid for load cases
Load Cycles defined with the fatigue stress type.
Import Load Cases Copies the load cases from another file. The units and load types of the copied file must match those of the current file.
Building Static Load Cases

Providing Wind Data

Up to four different wind load cases may be specified for any one job.
The only wind load information that is specified in the Piping Input is the shape factor. It is this shape factor input that
causes load cases WIN1, WIN2, WIN3, and WIN4 to be listed as an available load to be analyzed. More wind data is
required, however, before an analysis can be made. When wind loads are used in the model, CAESAR II makes available the
screen to define the extra wind load data. Once defined, this input is stored and may be changed on subsequent entries into
the static analysis processor.
To specify the wind data needed for the analysis click the Wind Loads tab for the appropriate wind load case. The Wind
Load tab appears:
Wind Load Specifications

There are three different methods that can be used to generate wind loads on piping systems:
• ASCE #7 Standard Edition, 1995
• User entry of a pressure vs. elevation table
• User entry of a velocity vs. elevation table

The appropriate method is selected by placing a value of 1.0 in one of the first three boxes.
When defining a pressure or velocity vs. elevation table the user needs to specify only the method and the wind direction on
the preceding screen. Upon pressing the User Wind Profile button, the user is prompted for the corresponding pressure or
velocity table. If a uniform pressure or velocity is to act over the entire piping system, then only a single entry needs to be
made in the table, otherwise the user should enter the pressure or velocity profile for the applicable wind loading.
Note: To use the ASCE #7 wind loads, all of the fields should be filled in.
For example, as per ASCE #7, the following are typical basic wind-speed values:
California and West Coast Areas-124.6 ft./sec. ( 85 m.p.h.)
Rocky Mountains- 132.0 ft./sec ( 90 m.p.h.)
Great Plains- 132.0 ft./sec ( 90 m.p.h.)
Non-Coastal Eastern United States-132.0 ft./sec ( 90 m.p.h.)
Gulf Coast- 190.6 ft./sec (130 m.p.h.)
Florida-Carolinas- 190.6 ft./sec (130 m.p.h.)
Miami- 212.6 ft./sec (145 m.p.h.)
New England Coastal Areas- 176.0 ft./sec (120 m.p.h.)
Copy Wind Vector - Users may copy the Wind data from any defined Wind Case to any remaining Wind Cases by clicking
the Copy Wind Vector button. This is especially useful for large Wind Pressure or Velocity vs. Elevation tables.
Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters

Up to four different hydrodynamic load cases may be specified for any one job.
Several hydrodynamic coefficients are defined on the element spreadsheet. The inclusion of hydrodynamic coefficients
causes the loads WAV1, WAV2, WAV3, and WAV4 to be available in the Load Case Editor.
A CAESAR II Hydrodynamic Loading dialog is shown in the following figure.
In the Load Case Editor, four different wave load profiles can be specified. Current data and wave data may be specified
and included together or either of them may be omitted so as to exclude the data from the analysis. CAESAR II supports three
current models and six wave models. See the CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual for a detailed discussion of
hydrodynamic analysis.
Note: Wave data may be copied between any of the four defined vectors to any of the unused vectors by clicking the Copy
Wave Vector button.
Execution of Static Analysis

The static analysis performed by CAESAR II follows the regular finite element solution routine. Element stiffnesses are
combined to form a global system stiffness matrix. Each basic load case defines a set of loads for the ends of all the
elements. These elemental load sets are combined into system load vectors. Using the relationship of force equals stiffness
times displacement (F=KX), the unknown system deflections and rotations can be calculated. The known deflections
however, may change during the analysis as hanger sizing, nonlinear supports, and friction all affect both the stiffness
matrix and load vectors. The root solution from this equation, the system-wide deflections and rotations, is used with the
element stiffnesses to determine the global (X,Y,Z) forces and moments at the end of each element. These forces and
moments are translated into a local coordinate system for the element from which the code-defined stresses are calculated.
Forces and moments on anchors, restraints, and fixed displacement points are summed to balance all global forces and
moments entering the node. Algebraic combinations of the basic load cases pick up this process where appropriate - at the
displacement, force & moment, or stress level.
Once the setup for the solution is complete the calculation of the displacements and rotations is repeated for each of the
basic load cases. During this step, the Incore Solution status dialog appears.
Incore Solution Module

This dialog serves as a monitor of the static analysis. The dialog is broken down into several areas. The area on the upper
left reflects the size of the job by listing the number of equations to be solved and the bandwidth of the matrix, which holds
these equations. Multiplying the number of equations by the bandwidth gives a relative indication of the job size. This area
also lists the current load case being analyzed and the total number of basic load cases to be solved. The iteration count, as
well as the current case number, shows how much “work” has been completed. Load cases with nonlinear restraints may
require several solutions (iterations) before the changing assumptions about the restraint configuration (e.g. resting or lifting
off, active or inactive) are confirmed.
In the lower left screen of the big box are two bar graphs, which indicate where the program is in an individual solution.
These bar graphs illustrate the speed of the solution. By checking the data in this first box, users will have an idea of how
much longer to wait for the results.
The right side of the solution screen also provides information to users regarding the status of nonlinear restraints and
hangers in the job. For example, messages noting the number of restraints that have yet to converge or any hangers that
appear to be taking no load, are displayed here. Nonlinear restraint status may be stepped through on an individual basis by
using the [F2]/[F4] function keys.
Following the analysis of the system deflections and rotations, these results are post-processed in order to calculate the local
forces, moments, and stresses for the basic load cases and all results for the algebraic combinations (e.g. L1-L2). These total
system results are stored in a file with the suffix “_P” (e.g. TUTOR._P).
Note: The “_A” or input file, the “_P” or output file, and the "OTL" (Output Time Link File) are all that is required to
archive the static analysis. The remaining scratch files may be eliminated from the system without any impact on the work
completed.
During this post processing, the Status frame lists the current element for which the forces and stresses are being calculated.
Once the last element’s stresses are computed, the output processor screen is presented. Use this menu to interactively
review the graphic and tabular results of the analysis. Interactive processing of output results is discussed in detail in
Chapter 7 of this document.
Static Output Screen

Notes on CAESAR II Load Cases

Definition of a Load Case
In CAESAR II terms, a load case is a group of piping system loads that are analyzed together, i.e., that are assumed to be
occurring at the same time. An example of a load case is an operating analysis composed of the thermal, deadweight, and
pressure loads together. Another is an as-installed analysis of deadweight loads alone. A load case may also be composed of
the combinations of the results of other load cases; for example, the difference in displacements between the operating and
installed cases. No matter what the contents of the load case, it always produces a set of reports in the output, which list
restraint loads, displacements and rotations, internal forces, moments, and stresses. Because of piping code definitions of
calculation methods and/or allowable stresses, the load cases are also tagged with a stress category. For example, the
combination mentioned above might be tagged as an EXPansion stress case.
The piping system loads which compose the basic (non-combination) load sets relate to various input items found on the
Piping Input screen. The table below lists the individual load set designations, their names and the input items, which make
them available for analysis.
Designation Name Input items which activate this load case

W Deadweight Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight, Fluid Weight, Rigid Weight
WNC Weight No fluid Contents Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight, Rigid Weight
WW Water Weight Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight, Water-filled Weight, Rigid

Weight (usually used for Hydro Test)
T1 Thermal Set 1 Temperature #1
P1 Pressure Set 1 Pressure #1
.
Designation Name Input items which activate this load case

HP Hydrostatic Test Pressure Hydro Pressure
D1 Displacements Set 1 Displacements (1st Vector)
D2 Displacements Set 2 Displacements (2nd Vector)
D3 Displacements Set 3 Displacements (3rd Vector)
Displacements (9th Vector) Displacements (9th Vector) Displacements (9th Vector)
D9 Displacement Set 9 Displacements (9th Vector)
F1 Force Set 1 Forces/Moments (1st Vector)
F2 Force Set 2 Forces/Moments (2nd Vector)
F3 Force Set 3 Forces/Moments (3rd Vector)
F9 Force Set 9 Forces/Moments (9th Vector)
WIN1 Wind Load 1 Wind Shape Factor
WAV1 Wave Load 1 Wave Load On
U1 Uniform Loads Uniform Loads (1st Vector)
U2 Uniform Loads Uniform Loads (2nd Vector)
U3 Uniform Loads Uniform Loads (3rd Vector)
CS Cold Spring Material # 18 or 19
H Hanger Initial Loads Hanger Design or Pre-specified Hangers
.
Note: Available piping system loads display on the left side of the Static Load Case screen.
Basic load cases may consist of a single load such as WNC for an as-installed weight analysis, or they may include several
loads added together such as W+T1+P1+D1+F1 for an operating analysis. The stress categories: SUStained, expansion,
occasional, operating, and FATigue are specified at the end of the load case definition. The complete definition of the two
examples are: WNC (SUS) and W+T1+P1+D1+H (OPE). Each basic load case is entered in this manner in a list for
analysis.
When building basic load cases, load components (such as W, T1, D1, WIND1, etc.) may now be preceded by scale factors
such as 2.0, -0.5, etc. Likewise, when building combination cases, references to previous load cases may also be preceded
by scale factors as well. This provides the user with a number of benefits:
In the event that one loading is a multiple of the other (i.e., safe Shutdown Earthquake being two times Operating Basis
Earthquake, only one loading need be entered in the piping input module; it may be used in a scaled or unscaled form in
the Load Case Editor.
In the event that a loading may be directionally reversible (i.e., wind or earthquake) only one loading need be entered in
the piping input module; it may be used preceded by a + or a - to switch direction.
Load Rating Design Factor (LRDF) methods may be implemented by scaling individual load components by their risk-
dependent factors, for example:
1.05W + 1.1T1+1.1D1+1.25 WIND1
Note: Available stress types may be selected from the pull-down list on each line.
Results of the basic load cases may be combined using algebraic combination cases. These algebraic combinations are
always entered following the last of the basic load cases. Combinations of basic load cases are designated using the prefix
L1, L2, etc.
Note: All load cases with stress type FATigue must have their expected number of Load Cycles specified.
An example set of loads displays below.
The following family of load cases provides a valid example of algebraic combinations.
Load Case Designation Comments

1 W+T1+P1+H+0.67CS (OPE) Hot operating; note the 0.67 scale factor which takes credit
only for 2/3 of the cold spring
2 W1+P1+H+0.67CS(OPE) Cold operating: with cold spring included
3 W1+P1+H(SUS) Traditional sustained case
4 WIN1(OCC) Wind case; note this will be manipulated later to represent

average wind 1X, maximum wind 2X, also positive and
negative directions.
5 L1-L2(EXP) Traditional expansion case, cold to hot (note reference to

"L" for "Load", rather than "DS".
6 L1-L2(FAT) Same case but now evaluated for fatigue at 10,000 cycles.
7 L1+L4(OPE) Hot operating with average wind (in positive direction).
8 L1-L4(OPE) Hot operating with average wind (in negative direction).
9 L1+2L4(OPE) Hot operating with maximum wind (in positive direction).
10 L1-2L4(OPE) Hot operating with maximum wind (in negative direction).
11 L2+L4(OPE) Cold operating with average wind (in positive direction).

Load Case Designation Comments

12 L2-L4(OPE) Cold operating with average wind (in negative direction).
13 L2+2L4(OPE) Cold operating with maximum wind (in positive direction).
14 L2-2L4(OPE) Cold operating with maximum wind (in negative direction).
15 L3+L4(OCC) Occasional stress case, sustained plus average wind.
16 L3+2L4(OCC) Occasional stress case, sustained plus maximum wind.
17 L9+L10+L11+L12(OPE) Maximum restraint load case (the combination option

should be MAX).
Note: CAESAR II permits the specification of up to ninety-nine load cases for analysis. In the rare situation where more
cases are required, the model should be copied to a new file in order to specify the additional load cases.
Load Case Options Tab

CAESAR II offers a second tab on the Static Load Case screen - Load Case Options. Among other features, this screen
allows the user to define alternative and more meaningful Load Case names, as shown in the figure below.
User Defined Names

The user-defined names appear in the Static Output Processor in the Load Case report (for more information, see below),
and may also be used in place of the built load case names anywhere in the Static Output Processor, by activating the
appropriate option.
Note: Load case names cannot exceed 132 characters in length.

User Control of Produced Results Data

CAESAR II allows the user to specify whether any or all of the load case results are retained for review in the Static Output
Processor. This is done through the use of two controls found on the Load Case Options tab. These are:
Output Status
This item controls the disposition of the entire results of the load case -- the available options are Keep or Discard. The
former would be used when the load case is producing results that the user may wish to review; the latter option would be
used for artificial cases such as the preliminary hanger cases, or intermediate construction cases. For example, in the load
list shown in the figure, the Wind only load case could have been optionally designated as Discard, since it was built only to
be used in subsequent combinations, and has no great value as a standalone load case. Note that load cases used for hanger
design (i.e., the weight load case and hanger travel cases designated with the stress type HGR) must be designated as
Discard. Note that for all load cases created under previous versions of CAESAR II, all load cases except the HGR cases are
converted as Keep; likewise the default for all new cases (except for HGR load cases) is also Keep.
Output Type
This item designates the type of results that are available for the load cases, which have received a Keep status. This could
be used to help minimize clutter on the output end, and ensure that only meaningful results are retained. The available
options are:
Disp/Force/Stress - Provides displacements, restraint loads, global and local forces, and stresses. This would be a good
choice for Operating cases, when designing to those codes which do a code check on operating stresses, because the load
case would be of interest for interference checking (displacements) and restraint loads at one operating extreme (forces).
Disp/Force - Provides displacements restraint loads, global and local forces. This would be a good choice for OPE cases
when designing for those codes which do not do a code check on OPE stresses.
Disp/Stress - Provides displacements and stresses only.
Force/Stress - Provides restraint loads, global and local forces, and stresses. This might be a good choice for the Sustained
(cold) case, because the load case would be of interest for restraint loads at one operating extreme (forces), and code
compliance (stresses). Note that FR combination loads cases developed under previous versions of CAESAR II are converted
with this Force/Stress type.
Disp - Provides displacements only.
Force - Provides restraint loads, global and local forces only.
Stress - Provides stresses only. This would be a good choice for a sustained plus Occasional load case (with Abs
combination method), since this is basically an artificial construct used for code stress checking purposes only. Note that ST
combination load cases developed under previous versions of CAESAR II are converted with this Stress type.
Snubbers Active?
Activating this option causes the snubbers to be considered to be rigid restraints for this particular load case. By default,
OCC load cases activate this option, while other types of load cases default to an inactive state.
Hanger Stiffness
The three options available here are As Designed, Rigid, and Ignore, and cause CAESAR II to (1) consider the actual spring
hanger stiffnesses, (2) model the spring hangers as rigid restraints, or (3) remove the spring hanger stiffnesses from the
model, respectively. As Designed should be used for most "real" (non-hanger design) load cases. Rigid should be used for
the Restrained Weight Case and any Hydrotest Case (if the spring hangers are pinned during it).
(Note that during the Restrained Weight Case user-defined hangers will not be made rigid.) Ignore is normally used for the
Operating for Hanger Travel Cases -- except in those cases where the user wishes to include the stiffness of the selected
spring in the Operating for Hanger Travel Case (and iterate to a solution). In that case, the user should select As Designed
for those cases as well. In that case, it is very important that the hanger load in the Cold Case (in the physical system) be
adjusted to match the reported hanger Cold Load.
Friction Multiplier
This multiplier may be used to alter (or deactivate) the friction factors used in this particular load case. The friction factor
(Mu) used at each restraint will be this multiplier times the Mu factor at each restraint. Setting this value to zero deactivates
friction for this load case.
Elastic Modulus
Designates use of Cold (EC) or any of the nine (EH1-EH9) hot elastic moduli in determining results on a load case per
condition basis.
User-Controlled Combination Methods

For combination cases, CAESAR II provides the user with the ability to explicitly designate the combination method to be
used. Load cases to be combined are designated as L1, L2, etc., for Load Case 1, Load Case 2, etc., with the combination
method selected from a drop list on the Load Case Options tab. The available methods are:
Algebraic
This method combines the displacements, forces, moments, restraint loads, and pressures of the designated load cases in an
algebraic (vectorial) manner. The resultant forces, moments, and pressures are then used (along with the SIFs and element
cross-sectional parameters) to calculate the piping stresses. Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors (1.8, -, etc.)
prior to doing the combination.
The obsolete CAESAR II combination methods DS and FR used an Algebraic combination method. Therefore, load cases
built in previous versions of CAESAR II using the DS and FR methods are converted to the Algebraic method. Also, new
combination cases automatically default to this method, unless designated by the user). In the load case list shown in the
figure, most of the combination cases are typically built with the Algebraic method.
Note that in the load case list shown in the figure, most of the combination cases typically are built with the Algebraic
method. Note that Algebraic combinations may be built only from basic (i.e., non-combination) load cases or other load
cases built using the Algebraic combination method.
Scalar
This method combines the displacements, forces, moments, restraint loads, and stresses of the designated load cases in a
Scalar manner (i.e., not as vectors, but retaining consideration of sign). Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors
prior to doing the combination (for example, for a negative multiplier, stresses would be subtractive). This method might
typically be used when adding plus or minus seismic loads to an operating case, or when doing an Occasional Stress Code
check (i.e. scalar addition of the Sustained and Occasional stresses).
The obsolete CAESAR II combination methods ST used a Scalar combination method. Therefore, load cases built in previous
versions of CAESAR II using the ST method are converted to the Scalar method.
SRSS
This method combines the displacements, forces, moments, restraint loads, and stresses of the designated load cases in a
Square Root of the Sum of the Squares (SRSS) manner. Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors prior to doing
the combination however, due to the squaring used by the combination method, negative values vs. positive values will
yield no difference in the result. This method is typically used when combining seismic loads acting in orthogonal
directions.
ABS
This method combines the displacements, forces, moments, restraint loads, and stresses of the designated load cases in an
Absolute Value manner. Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors prior to doing the combination however, due
to the absolute values used by the combination method, negative values vs. positive values will yield no difference in the
result. This method may be used when doing an Occasional Stress code check (i.e., absolute summation of the Sustained
and Occasional stresses).
Note: The Occasional Stress cases in the figure are built using this method.
Max
For each result value, this combination method selects the displacement, force, moment, restraint load, and stress having the
largest absolute value from the designated load cases; so no actual combination per se, takes place. Load case results are
multiplied by any scale factors prior to doing the selection of the maxima. This method is typically used when determining
the design case (worst loads, stress, etc.) from a number of loads.
Note: The maximum Restraint Load case shown in the figure uses a Max combination method.
Min
For each result value, this combination method selects the displacement, force, moment, restraint load, and stress having the
smallest absolute value from the designated load cases; so no actual combination per se, takes place. Load case results are
multiplied by any scale factors prior to the selection of the minima.
SignMax
For each result value, this combination method selects the displacements, force, moments, restraint load, and stress having
the largest actual value, considering the sign, from the designated load cases; so no actual combination per se, takes place.
Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors prior to doing the selection of the maxima. This combination method
would typically be used in conjunction with the SignMin method to find the design range for each value (i.e., the maximum
positive and maximum negative restraint loads).
SignMin
For each result value, this combination method selects the displacements, force, moments, restraint load, and stress having
the smallest actual value, considering the sign, from the designated load cases; so no actual combination per se, takes place.
Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors prior to doing the selection of the minima. This combination method
would typically be used in conjunction with the SignMax method to find the design range for each value (i.e., the maximum
positive and maximum negative restraint loads).
Recommended Load Cases

When the user first enters the Static Load Case Editor CAESAR II recommends, based on the loads defined in the model,
three types of load cases: Operating, Sustained, and Expansion (but not occasional).
Operating load cases represent the loads acting on the pipe during hot operation, including both primary (weight pressure,
and force) loadings and secondary (displacement and thermal) loadings. Operating cases are used to find hot displacements
for interference checking, and hot restraint and equipment loads. Generally when recommending operating load cases,
CAESAR II combines weight, pressure case #1, and hanger loads with each of the thermal load cases (displacement set #1
with thermal set #1, displacement set #2 with thermal set #2, etc....), and then with any cold spring loads.
Sustained load cases represent the primary force-driven loadings acting on the pipe, i.e., weight and pressure alone. This
usually coincides with the cold (as-installed) load case. Sustained load cases are used to satisfy the code sustained stress
requirements, as well as to calculate as-installed restraint and equipment loads. Sustained load cases are generally built by
combining weight with each of the pressure and force sets, and then with any hanger loads.
Expansion load cases represent the range between the displacement extremes (usually between the operating and sustained
cases). Expansion load cases are used to meet expansion stress requirements.
Most users will specify only one temperature and one pressure. Such input would simplify the recommended cases to
something like:
Case # 1 W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE) ....OPERATING
Case # 2 W+P1+H (SUS)....SUSTAINED LOAD CASE
Case # 3 L1-L2 (EXP)....EXPANSION LOAD CASE
The user should review any load recommendations made by CAESAR II.
Note: CAESAR II does not recommend any occasional load cases. Definition of these is the responsibility of the user.
If these recommended load cases do not satisfy the analysis requirements, they may always be deleted or modified.
Conversely, the load cases may always be reset to the program recommended set at any time.
If the user has an operating temperature below ambient in addition to one above ambient the user should add another
expansion load case as follows:
Case # 1 W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE) ....
Case # 2 W+D2+T2 +P1+H (OPE) ....
Case # 3 W+P1+H (SUS)....SUSTAINED LOAD CASE
Case # 4L1-L3 (EXP)....EXPANSION LOAD CASE
Case # 5L2-L3 (EXP)....EXPANSION LOAD CASE
Case # 6L2-L1 (EXP)....the user should add this since it is not recommended by CAESAR II.
Recommended Load Cases for Hanger Selection

If spring hangers are to be designed by the program, two additional load cases must first be analyzed in order to obtain the
data required to select a variable support. The two basic requirements for sizing hangers are the deadweight carried by the
hanger (hot load) and the range of vertical travel to be accommodated. The first load case (traditionally called “Restrained
Weight”) consists of only deadweight (W). For this analysis CAESAR II includes a rigid restraint in the vertical direction at
every location where a hanger is to be sized. The load on the restraint from this analysis is the deadweight that must be
carried by the support in the hot condition. For the second load case, the hanger is replaced with an upward force equal to
the calculated hot load, and an operating load case is run. This load case (traditionally called “Free Thermal”) includes the
deadweight and thermal effects, the first pressure set (if defined), and any displacements, (W+D1+T1+P1). The vertical
displacements of the hanger locations, along with the previously calculated deadweights are then passed on to the hanger
selection routine.
Once the hangers are sized, the added forces are removed and replaced with the selected supports along with their pre-loads
(cold loads), designated by load component H. (Note that load component H may appear in the load cases for hanger design
if the user has predefined any springs- in this case it would represent the pre-defined operating loads.) CAESAR II then
continues with the load case recommendations as defined above. A typical set of recommended load cases for a single
operating load case spring hanger design appears as follows:
Case # 1W ....WEIGHT FOR HANGER LOADS
Case # 2W+D1+T1+P1 ....OPERATING FOR HANGER TRAVEL
Case # 3W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE) ...OPERATING (HGRS. INCLUDED
Case # 4W+P1+H (SUS) ....SUSTAINED LOAD CASE
Case # 5L3-L4 (EXP) ....EXPANSION LOAD CASE
These hanger sizing load cases (#1 & #2) generally supply no information to the output reports other than the data found in
the hanger tables. Note how cases 3, 4, & 5 match the recommended load cases for a standard analysis with one thermal and
one pressure defined. Also notice how the displacement combination numbers in case 5 have changed to reflect the new
order. If multiple temperatures and pressures existed in the input, they too would appear in this set after the second spring
hanger design load case.
Two other hanger design criteria also affect the recommended load cases. If the “actual cold loads” for selected springs are
to be calculated, one additional load case (WNC+H) would appear before case #3 above. If the piping system’s hanger
design criteria is set so that the proposed springs must accommodate more than one operating condition, other load cases
must additionally appear before the case #3 above. An extra hanger design operating load case must be performed for each
additional operating load case used to design springs. Refer to the discussion of the hanger design algorithm for more
information on these options.
CH AP TER 7
Chapter 7 Static Output Processor
In This Chapter
Entering the Static Output Processor ....................................................... 7-2
Custom Reports Toolbar.......................................................................... 7-6
Custom Reports ....................................................................................... 7-7
Report Options......................................................................................... 7-10
General Computed Results ...................................................................... 7-17
Output Viewer Wizard............................................................................. 7-20
Printing or Saving Reports to a File Notes .............................................. 7-21
3D/HOOPS Graphics in the Static Output Processor .............................. 7-23
Animation of Static Results Notes........................................................... 7-26
7-2 Static Output Processor
Entering the Static Output Processor

With the completion of a static analysis the CAESAR II Output screen automatically appears, allowing interactive review
of the analytical results. Users may also be access the static results anytime after the analysis has been completed through
the CAESAR II Main Menu option - Output-Static.
Static Output
Once the output processor is launched, by either of the mentioned paths, the output screen appears. The left-hand column
shows the load cases that were analyzed. The center column shows the available reports associated with those load cases.
The right-hand column shows reports, such as input listings or hanger selection reports that are not associated with load
cases.
Note The proper job must be made current through the File-Open option before selecting the Static-Output processor
through the Main Menu.
Static Output Processor

The Processor screen enables users to manipulate all output review activity. The CAESAR II Output Processor was
designed so that piping results could be quickly reviewed in tabular form, graphically, or using any combination of the two
forms. Users may
• Interactively review reports for any selected combination of load cases and/or report types.
• Print or save to file copies for any combination of load cases and/or report types.
• Add Title lines to output reports.
Note CAESAR II enables users to select either extended and/or summarized versions of most standard reports.
A number of commands are available:

Opens a different job for output review. The user is prompted for the file to be opened.
File-Open
Saves the selected reports to a disk file. The user is initially prompted for the file name. After closing, or exit, a
File-Save Table of Contents is added to the file.
Prints the selected reports. After closing, or exiting, a Table of Contents is printed. This is described later in the
File-Print chapter.
Displays the selected reports on the terminal. This permits the analysis data to be reviewed interactively in text
format. After selecting the desired combination of one or more active load cases with any combination of report
View-Reports options and executing the View-Reports button, each report is presented one at a time for inspection. Users may
scroll through the reports vertically and horizontally where necessary.
Specific node numbers or results can be located and highlighted with the button. To move to the next report the
user should close the current report. When all reports have been reviewed, additional report selections may be
Find made.
For those users with access to Microsoft Word, CAESAR II provides the ability to send output reports directly to
Word. This permits the use of all of Word’s formatting features (font selection, margin control, etc.) and printer
Microsoft Word support from CAESAR II. This feature is activated through use of the Microsoft Word button when producing a
report. Word is available as an output device to the Static and Dynamic Output Processors. Users can append
multiple reports to form a final report, by selecting the desired reports, clicking the Microsoft Word button, closing
Word, selecting the next report to be added, clicking the button again, etc. A table of contents, reflecting the
cumulatively produced reports, always appears on the first page of the Word document.
Allows users to select either the CAESAR II Default Load Case names or the user-defined load case names for
output reports. Also available on the Options menu as Load Case Name. The user-defined load case names are
Select Case Names entered in the load case editor under the Load Options tab.
Allows users to select formatting of node numbers and names to output to reports. Also available on the Options
menu.
Select Node Name
Allows users to view graphic animation of the displacement solution.
Animation
Returns to the piping input processor.
Input
Allows the user to enter report titles for this group of reports. CAESAR II allows the user to customize the report
with a two line title or description. This title may be assigned once for all load case reports sent to the printer or a
Enter Titles disk drive; or the title may be changed for each individual report before it is moved to the output device. When
CAESAR II receives this command a dialog prompts for the titles
Report Titles
Note 28 characters of each entered title line are displayed for 80 column output reports and 50 characters of each entered
title line are displayed for 132 column output reports.

This command allows the user to superimpose analytical results onto a plot of the system model. This is described
in more detail later in the chapter.
Plot
Opens the Output Viewer Wizard to the right of the Static Output Processor. It aids the user in selecting specific
More reports and reviewing their order before sending the output to the selected device.
Custom Reports Toolbar

The Custom Reports toolbar enables users to access a variety of functions that can be used to manipulate the generated
reports.

Enables users to create new custom reports. At least one load case must be selected from the
Add New Custom Report Template Load Cases Analyzed list box to enable preview. After executing this command the Report
Template Editor dialog displays.
Enables users to modify and save existing custom reports, one at a time. At least one load case
Edit Existing Custom Report Template must be selected from the Load Cases Analyzed list box in addition to the custom report name to
preview the report. After executing this command the Report Template Editor dialog displays.
Enables users to permanently remove a custom report templates. This action can not be undone.
Delete One or More Custom Report Templates
Enables users to replace the current custom report templates (whether CAESAR II or user defined)
Reset Default Custom Report Templates with the CAESAR II Default Custom Report templates.
After executing this command, all the user defined or modified custom report templates will be
replaced by the CAESAR II default ones.
Note: This action affects ALL jobs system-wide and can not be undone.
Enables users to view existing custom reports on screen. Any number of load cases analyzed and
View Custom Report On Screen any number of custom reports can be selected to view. Custom Reports are presented one at a
time for inspection. Users may scroll through the reports vertically and horizontally where
appropriate. Double clicking the column headers allows sorting of the results.
Enables users to navigate through the reports. When all reports have been viewed, the Reports
View Previous Report Viewer dialog closes and returns control to the Static Output Processor.
Enables users to navigate through the reports. When all reports have been viewed, the Reports
View Next Report Viewer dialog closes and returns control to the Static Output Processor.
Custom Reports
Report Template Editor
After selecting the appropriate load case and custom report name and clicking Edit Existing or Add New Custom Report
Template the Report Template Editor dialog appears.
Report Template Editor Dialog

The Report Template Editor Dialog consists of two sections: the template editor to the left and the preview grid to the
right.
The template editor has a tree-like structure and resembles Window Explorer’s folder view. There are 8 major categories
available: Template Name and Template Settings for general report editing, and several output fields; Displacements,
Restraints, Global and Local Forces, Stresses, and Hanger Table Data.
The Template Name category allows users to specify the report name, enter a brief description of the report, and select the
report type. The report name followed by the template description display on the preview grid if the Include Report Name
option is checked under the Template Settings category.
There are 3 report types available:
• Individual - generates output reports, one per selected load case, in the format similar to the standard Displacements or
Restraints reports.
• Summary - generates a single output report for all the specified load cases as a summary, in the format similar to the
standard Restraint Summary report.
• Code Compliance - generates an output stress check report for multiple load cases as a single report, similar to the
standard Code Compliance report.
Note Actual columns and their order on the reports are controlled solely by the user. Data from various categories can be
customized on a single report to suit user's needs.
Template Settings provides options for the report header and the report body text, formatting and alignment. The user may
wish to include or remove specific header data by toggling the check box next to a particular piece of information. The font
face, size, and color for both headers and the report body may be set here.
Note Any changes in the editor are immediately reflected in the preview window to the right.
Each of the following categories consists of related output data. For example, Displacements category contains three
translational (DX, DY, and DZ) and three rotational (RX, RY, and RZ) fields; Stresses contains Axial, Bending, and Code
stresses among other stress related fields. A number next to the field name indicates the Column Number this field will be
placed in. When nothing or zero value is specified, this column will not be included in the current report.
Each field contains following information that can be easily controlled by the user:
Field Name Description

Column Number Indicates the order of the fields in the output report.
Precision Indicates the number of decimal places to be displayed.
Sort Order Specifies whether the data in the column is in ascending, descending, or in no order. This gives the user flexibility of reviewing
reports for maximum (or minimum) values without extra effort.
Display Node Number Allows the user to control appearance of the node number; currently has only "general" formatting as an option.
Display Element Index Allows the user to control whether or not and where the Element Index appears; currently has only "general" formatting as an
option.
Display Units Allows the user to control whether or not and where the Units label is displayed; currently has only "general" formatting as an
option.
Font Allows the user to specify text font face, size and color for this field whenever special formatting is required. Note: The
generic font settings for the entire report should be set at the Template Settings -> Body category.
Align Values Allows the user to control left, right, or center alignment of the values in the column.
Field Caption Allows the user to customize the name of the field as it appears on the report by typing the new caption.
Column Width Allows the user to control the size of the column,
Note When a category or any particular field is highlighted in the editor, the help text for this field is displayed in the
Help box at the bottom of the editor section.
The Preview Grid on the right of the Custom Report Template Editor dialog is interactive. Users may drag the columns
by their heading to arrange the order of the fields in the reports. Double clicking the column header will sort that column’s
values in ascending or descending order. The dragged column number or sorted order value will automatically be saved in
the Column Number or Sort Order entry of that field in the editor tree. Clicking the column header once will highlight that
field in the editor tree, extend its contents and scroll it to view.
Note The Preview Grid is limited to the first 50 lines for performance speedup. The entire report will be available after
selecting the appropriate load case(s) and the custom report name on the Static Output Processor screen and clicking View
Report.
Any current changes to the custom report template can be saved by clicking Save. The custom report template can also be
saved under a different name by clicking Save As... The Save As... dialog appears prompting the user to enter the new
template name a brief description, and the report type. Clicking Preview Report enables users to remove the grid lines
from the Preview Grid. Clicking the same button again will add the grid lines for editing.
Report Options
For most load cases (except hanger design and fatigue) there are a variety of different report options that can be selected for
review.
Displacements
Translations and rotations for each degree of freedom are reported at each node in the model.
Restraints
Forces and moments on each restraint in the model are reported. There is a separate report generated for each load case
selected.
Restraint Summary
Similar to the restraint report, this option provides force and moment data for all valid selected load cases together on one
report.
Global Element Forces

Forces and moments on the piping are reported for each node in the model.
Local Element Forces

These forces and moments have been transferring into the CAESAR II Local Coordinate system. Refer to the Technical
Reference Manual for information on this local coordinate system.
Stresses
SIFs and Code Stresses are reported for each node in the model. The code stresses are compared to the Allowable stress at
each node as a percentage. Note that stresses are not computed at nodes on rigid elements for more information see the
figure on the following page.
Stress Summary
The highest stresses at each node are presented for all load cases selected in summary format for quick review,
Code Compliance Report

Stress checks for multiple load cases may be included in a single report using the Code Compliance report, available from
the Static Output processor. For this report, the user selects all load cases of interest, and then highlights Code
Compliance under the Report Options. The resultant report shows the stress calculation for all load cases together, on an
element-by-element basis.
Cumulative Usage Report

The Cumulative Usage report is available only when there are one or more fatigue-type load cases present. Once the
Cumulative Usage report is generated, regardless of the number of load cases selected, showing the combined impact of
simulating selected fatigue loadings.
General Computed Results

Load Case Report
The Load Case Report documents the Basic Names (as built in the Load Case Builder), User-Defined Names,
Combination Methods, Load Cycles, and Load Case Options (Output Status, Output Type, Snubber Status, Hanger Stiffness
Status, and Friction Multiplier) of the static load cases. This report is available from the General Computed Results
column of the Static Output Processor.
Hanger Table with Text

This report provides basic information regarding spring hangers either selected by CAESAR II or the user. Information
provided includes the node number, the number of springs required, the hanger table figure number and size, the hot load,
the theoretical installed load, which is what the hangers are set to in the field prior to pulling the pins, the actual installed
load, which is the load on the hanger when the pipe is empty, the spring rate from the catalog, and the horizontal movement
determined from the CAESAR II output. If constant effort supports are selected then the hanger constant effort force is
reported.
Input Echo
The input echo allows the user to select which portions of the input are to be reported in this output format. All basic
element data (geometry), operating conditions, material properties, and boundary conditions are available in this report
option.
Miscellaneous Data
This report displays the Allowable Stress Summary, Bend Data, Nozzle Flexibility Data, Pipe Report, Thermal Expansion
Coefficients used during analysis, Bill of Materials, the Center of Gravity Report, and Wind and Wave input data.
Warnings
All warnings reported during the error checking process are summarized here.
Output Viewer Wizard

After clicking More >> in the lower right corner of the Static Output Processor, an Output Viewer Wizard dialog
displays to the right. The Output Viewer Wizard can be hidden again by clicking Less <<.
Output Viewer Wizard

The Output Viewer Wizard consists of the Report Order window and auxiliary operational buttons. It enables users to
add any report to the view by clicking Add or delete any report not needed by clicking Remove. Users can arrange the order
of the reports by moving them up or down by clicking Move Up or Move Down on the selected report.
Users may send a report to screen or to printer by checking the appropriate radio button in the upper section of the Output
Viewer Wizard dialog. After clicking Finish, the reports are automatically sent to the specified device in the order
displayed in the Report Order window.
If the user places a corresponding check mark in the Generate Table of Contents (TOC) box a (TOC) is appended to the
printed reports .
Note The TOC will display if Send to Screen was selected, regardless if the TOC check box was enabled or disabled.
Printing or Saving Reports to a File Notes

The tabular results brought to the screen may be sent directly to a printer. Different combinations of load cases and report
types may be chosen, each followed by the File-Print command, to create a single report.

Prints hard copies of the reports. To print hard copies of multiple reports as a single report, use the Output
Viewer Wizard to populate the report order tree, click Send To Printer and then Finish.
Sends reports to a file (in ASCII format) rather than the printer. After initial selection, users are a file dialog
File Save appears where users must select the file.name. To change the file name for a new report, select FILE-SAVE AS.
Typically, the set of output reports that a user might wish to print out for documentation purposes might be:
Load Case Report Purpose

SUSTAINED STRESS Code compliance
EXPANSION STRESS Code compliance
OPERATING DISPLACEMENTS Interference checks
OPERATING RESTRAINTS Hot restraint, equipment loads
SUSTAINED RESTRAINTS As-installed restraint, equipment loads
Note Load cases used for hanger sizing produce no reports. Also, the hanger table and hanger table with text reports are
printed only once even though more than one active load case may be highlighted.
To save multiple reports as a single report to a file, use the Output Viewer Wizard.
Save As Dialog
Note: The signs in all CAESAR II Reports show the forces and moments that act “ON” something. The Element
Force/Moment report shows the forces and moments that act “ON” each element to keep that element in static equilibrium.
The Restraint Force/Moment report shows the forces and moments that act “ON” each restraint.
Note: When sending reports to MSWord, if a file named "header.doc" exists in the \caesar\system directory, its contents
will be read and used as the page header when CAESAR II exports the report to MSWord. The intent is that "header.doc"
contains the company logo, address details and formatting for tables. The interface uses a style names "report table" which
users can setup in "header.doc".
3D/HOOPS Graphics in the Static Output Processor

The Static Output Processor Graphics Engine is used to review analytic results in graphic mode. The Static Output 3D
Graphics Engine shares the same general capabilities as the Piping Input Processor's Graphics. It uses the same HOOPS
Standard Toolbar that enables users to zoom, orbit, pan, and several other options among them the ability to switch views
and modes.
Additional capabilities of the Static Output Graphics Engine can be found on the Output Toolbar and include the display
of displaced shapes, highlighting and zooming to maximum displacements, restraint loads, and stresses of the model. One of
the major advantages of the 3D Graphics over the original CAESAR II graphics is the graphical representation of stresses
by value and by percent using color.
Output Toolbar
A variety of CAESAR II Output Plot functions are accessed from the Show menu that is broken into sub-menus
Displacements, Restraints, Forces/Moments, and Stresses. Alternatively, these functions can be activated by clicking the
appropriate buttons
The CAESAR II Output Graphics Engine is extensive. Users are encouraged to experiment with all the output options,
noting which ones could be most appropriate for a given application. Some of the output options are discussed below.

Deflected Shape Overlays the scaled geometry with a different color into the current plot for the selected load case. Clicking the
arrow to the right of this button displays an additional menu with the selected feature checked and the Adjust
Deflection Scale option.
Adjust Deflection Scale Specifies the deflected shape plot scale factor.
Note: Entering a value that is too small may prevent visual detection of the deflected shape. Entering a scale
value that is too large may graphically "break" or discontinue the model. This option can also be accessed from
the Show menu, by clicking DISPLACEMENT/DEFLECTED SHAPE.
Maximum Displacements Places the actual magnitude of the X, Y, or Z displacements on the currently displayed model.
Note: The element containing the displaced node is highlighted, and the camera viewpoint is repositioned
(preserving the optical distance to the model) to bring the displaced node to the center of the view. It starts with
highest value for the given direction, after pressing Enter, the remaining values are placed in a similar manner
until all values are exhausted or become zero. Clicking the Maximum Displacements button again clears the
view of the displayed values and highlighting. This option can also be accessed from the Show menu, by clicking
DISPLACEMENT/MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENT/(X, Y, OR Z). If none of the highlighted operations was previously used, the
default report shown will be the Stresses Report for currently selected load case.

Shows/hides the Event Viewer on the plot. One of the advantages of the Event Viewer Grid dialog is its ability
Show Event Viewer Grid to navigate among the elements, navigate to various reports within a load case, and even viewing the reports for
other load cases. This is done in the Report Selection window on the left in the dialog. This window has a tree
structure similar in operation to Windows Explorer™. Clicking the + sign for a particular load case will expand
the tree of its reports. Selecting the report displays the data in the grid view to the right. Selecting a node or an
element in the grid view (when Select Elements is enabled) highlights the corresponding element on the graphics
view, and zooms to the selected element if the corresponding Zoom to Selection is enabled. Similarly, clicking an
element on the graphics view highlights the corresponding data row in the report view of the Event Viewer
dialog. Thus, this is a bidirectional connection.
Changing the load case within the Event Viewer Grid dialog will update the graphics view (if applicable) and the
Load Case Selection pull-down box on the toolbar.
Allows the user to select one element at a time in the graphics. The Event Viewer dialog is also used in
Select Elements conjunction with the Select Elements button. When Select Elements is active, or when users double click on an
element, CAESAR II highlights it and displays it in the Event Viewer dialog with the corresponding element
highlighted in the report grid.
Adds restraints symbols to the plot. Restraints are plotted as arrowheads with the direction of the arrow indicating
Output Restraints Symbols the direction of the force exerted by the restraint on the piping geometry
Places the actual magnitude of the calculated restraint loads (corresponding to the particular button) for a selected
load case on the currently displayed geometry. The Maximum Restraints Loads button displays the load
magnitude value next to the node, the element containing the node is highlighted and is brought to the center of
the graphics view. The Zoom to Selection and Show Event Viewer Grid options are still available at the
discretion of the user. After pressing Enter any remaining values will be placed in a similar manner.
Maximum Restraint Loads
Displays the stress magnitudes in descending order one at a time.

Maximum Code Stress
Note: The Maximum Code Stress buttons’ operation is similar to the Maximum Displacements button, the
stress value is displayed next to the node and the element containing the node is highlighted and is moved to the
center of the view.
The Zoom to Selection and Show Event Viewer Grid options are still available at the discretion of the user.
After pressing Enter the 2nd, the 3rd, etc. highest value is placed in the similar manner with corresponding
element highlighting.
In addition to the "dry" numbers that could be found in a corresponding report, this option gives the user graphical
representation and distribution of large calculated code stresses throughout the system.
Displays the overstressed point distribution for a particular load case. Nodes with a calculated "code stress to
allowable stress ratio" of 100% or more display in red; the remaining nodes/elements display in the color selected
Overstress for the lowest percent ratio. This feature is useful to quickly observe the overstressed areas in the model.
Note: Overstressed conditions are only detected for load cases where a code compliance check was done (i.e., where
there are allowable stresses available).
Note: Overstressed nodes will display in red in the Event Viewer Grid (if it is enabled).
Note: The model is still fully functional, it can be zoomed, panned, or rotated at the discretion of the user.

Displays the piping system in a range of colors, where the color corresponds to a certain boundary value of the code
Code Stress Colors by stress. This feature is used to quickly see the distribution of the code stresses in the model for a particular load case.
Value
In addition to the model color highlight in the graphics view, the corresponding color key legend window is displayed in the
top left corner of the graphics view. The legend window can be resized and moved.
The colors and corresponding stress levels can be set in the CONFIGURATION/SETUP module, on the Plot Colors tab.

Displays the piping system in a range of colors, where the color corresponds to a certain percent ratio of code
Code Stress Colors by Percent stress to allowable stress. This option is only valid for load cases where a code compliance check was done (i.e.,
where there are allowable stresses available).
Code Stress Colors by Percent is similar to the Stress Colors by Value option and is generally used to quickly see the
distribution of the code stress to allowable ratios in the model for a particular load case. The legend window with the
corresponding color key also displays in the left upper corner of the graphics view. The legend window can be resized and
moved.
Clicking the arrow to the right of this button displays an additional menu with two options: Display and Adjust Settings .
Selecting the Display option displays the color distribution. Selecting the Adjust Settings option displays the Stress
Settings dialog where desired values and corresponding colors could be set or adjusted. These settings are related to the
particular job they are set for and are saved in the corresponding job_name.XML file in the current job data directory (see
3D/HOOPS Graphics in Piping Input Processor, 3D Graphics Configuration chapter for more information on the *.XML
file).
Code Stress Colors by Percent

Animation of Static Results Notes

CAESAR II allows the user to view the piping system as it moves to the displaced position of the basic load cases. To animate
the static results, execute the View-Animate command. The following screen appears:
Animated Graphic Screen

The Animated Plot menu has several plot selections. Motion and Volume Motion are the commands to activate the
animation. Motion uses centerline representation while Volume Motion produces 3D graphics. The desired load case may
be selected from the drop down list. Animations may be sped up or slowed down or stopped using the toolbars.
CAESAR II also enables users to save animated plots as HTML files by clicking FILE/SAVE AS ANIMATION. After saving these
files users can view them on any machine outside of CAESAR II.
Note The corresponding animation graphics file <job_name>.HSF must be transferred along with the HTML file for
proper display.
CH AP TER 8
Chapter 8 Dynamic Input and Analysis
In This Chapter
Dynamic Capabilities in CAESAR II ...................................................... 8-2
Dynamic Analysis Input Processor Overview ......................................... 8-5
Input Overview Based on Analysis Category .......................................... 8-7
Harmonic ................................................................................................. 8-9
Earthquake (Spectrum) ............................................................................ 8-12
Relief Loads (Spectrum).......................................................................... 8-17
DLF/Spectrum Generator - The Spectrum Wizard .................................. 8-18
Water Hammer/Slug Flow (Spectrum) .................................................... 8-32
Time History............................................................................................ 8-33
Error Handling and Analyzing the Job .................................................... 8-36
8-2 Dynamic Input and Analysis
Dynamic Capabilities in CAESAR II

The dynamic analysis capabilities found in CAESAR II include natural frequency calculations, harmonic analysis, response
spectrum analysis, and time history analysis. Included with the CAESAR II Dynamic modules are processors, which can
generate several types of dynamic loads. An example is the processor, which converts loading with respect to time into a
force response spectrum. This ability to define different types of dynamic effects improves the accuracy of dynamic
modeling and makes these methods suitable for a wider range of dynamic problems.
Natural frequency information can indicate the tendency of a piping system to respond to dynamic loads. A system’s modal
natural frequencies typically should not be too close to equipment operating frequencies and, as a general rule, higher
natural frequencies usually cause less trouble than low natural frequencies. CAESAR II provides both calculation of a
system’s modal natural frequencies, as well as animated plots of the associated mode shapes.
CAESAR II also provides for the analysis of dynamic loads that are cyclic in nature. Applications of harmonic analyses
include fluid pulsation in reciprocating pump lines or vibration due to rotating equipment. These loads are modeled as
concentrated forces or displacements at one or more points in the system. To provide the proper phase relationship between
multiple loads a phase angle can also be associated with these forces or displacements. Any number of forcing frequencies
may be analyzed allowing easy analysis of equipment start-up, and any operating modes. Harmonic responses represent the
maximum dynamic amplitude the piping system undergoes and have the same form as a static analysis - node deflections
and rotations, local forces and moments, restraint loads, and stresses. For example, if the results show an X displacement at
node 45 of 5.8 cm. then the dynamic motion due to the cyclic excitation would be from +5.8 cm. to -5.8 cm. at this point in
the system. The stresses shown are one half of, or one amplitude of, the full cyclic stress range.
The third type of dynamic analysis available in CAESAR II is the response spectrum method. The response spectrum method
allows an impulse type transient event to be characterized by a response vs. frequency spectra. Each mode of vibration of
the piping system is related to one response on the spectrum. These modal responses are summed together to produce the
total system response. The stresses for these analyses, summed with the sustained stresses, should be compared to the
occasional stress allowables defined by the piping code. Spectral analysis can be used in a wide variety of applications.
Ground motion associated with a seismic event is supplied as displacement, velocity, or acceleration response spectra. The
assumption is that all the supports move with the defined ground motion and the piping system “catches up” to the supports;
it is this inertial effect, which loads the system. The shock spectra, which define the ground motion, may vary between the
three global directions and may even change for different groups of supports (independent as opposed to uniform support
motion). Another response spectrum application is based on single point loading rather than a uniform inertial loading.
CAESAR II makes effective use of this technique to analyze a wide variety of impulse type transient loads. Relief valve
loads, water hammer loads, slug flow loads, and rapid valve closure type loads all cause single impulse dynamic loads at
various points in the piping system. The response to these dynamic forces can be confidently and conservatively predicted
using the force spectrum method.
The fourth type of dynamic analysis is time history analysis. This is one of the most accurate methods, in that it uses
numeric integration of the dynamic equation of motion to simulate the system response throughout the load duration.
CAESAR II’s Time History Analysis method can solve any type of dynamic loading, but due to its exact solution, requires
more resources (memory, calculation speed and time) than other methods. Therefore, it may not pay to use this method
when, for example the spectrum method offers sufficient accuracy.
Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis

The dynamic techniques employed by CAESAR II require strict linearity in the piping and structural systems. Dynamic
responses associated with nonlinear effects are not addressed. An example of a nonlinear effect is slapping, such as when a
pipe lifts off the rack at one moment and impacts the rack the next. For the dynamic model the pipe must be either held
down or allowed to move freely. The nonlinear restraints used in the static analysis must be set to be active or inactive for
the dynamic analysis. CAESAR II allows the user to set the nonlinear restraints to any configuration found in the static
results (this is done by specifying the number of the Static Load Case for Nonlinear Restraint Status). Most often the
user selects the operating case to set the nonlinear restraint configuration. For example, if a +Y support is active in the
static operating case (normally case 1 or 3), and the operating case is used to set the status of the nonlinear supports for
dynamics, CAESAR II installs a double-acting Y support at that location for the dynamic analysis. The pipe will not move up
or down at that point regardless of the dynamic load or tend to move.
A second nonlinear effect is friction. Friction effects must also be linearized for use in dynamic analysis. By default
CAESAR II excludes the effects of friction from the dynamic analysis. If requested CAESAR II can approximate the friction
resistance to movement in the dynamic model by including spring stiffness normal to the restraint line of action. For a Y
restraint with friction, the friction stiffness would be added in the X and Z directions. The stiffness of these springs is a user-
defined function of the friction has calculated in the static analysis. For a Y restraint with friction, the friction stiffness
would be added in the X and Z directions. The stiffness of these springs is a user-defined function of the friction load
calculated in the static analysis. CAESAR II computes the friction stiffness by multiplying the normal force on the restraint
from the selected static case results, by the friction coefficient, and by the user-defined Stiffness Factor for Friction. For
example, if the normal force on the on the restraint from the static analysis is 350lb., the friction coefficient (mu) is 0.3, and
the user-defined Stiffness Factor for Friction is 50.0, then springs having a stiffness of 350*0.3*50.0=5250 lb./in are
inserted into the dynamic model in the two directions perpendicular to the friction restraint's line of action. Converting
friction damping into a stiffness is usually not mathematically legitimate, but can serve as a good engineering
approximation for dynamic friction in a wide variety of situations.
Major Steps in Dynamic Input

Developing dynamic input for CAESAR II comprises four basic steps:
1. Specifying the load(s)

2. Modifying the mass and stiffness model
3. Setting the parameters that control the analysis
4. Starting and error checking the analysis
Except for starting the analysis, these steps may occur in any order. Due to the amount of data, which may be specified, it is
best to establish some sort of pattern in defining the input.
There is no reason to specify dynamic loads if only natural frequencies are to be counted or calculated. Harmonic analysis
requires the input of driving frequencies and forces or displacements to define and locate the sinusoidally varying point
loads. Creating the dynamic loads for spectra or time history analysis requires the most attention by the user. The response
spectra or time history profile must be defined, built, or selected. Force sets must be built for force response spectra and
time history analysis. Response spectra /time history (and force sets) are combined with other data to build the load cases to
be analyzed. Finally, additional load cases may be constructed by combining shock results with static results to check code
compliance on occasional stresses. CAESAR II provides several processors to simplify many of these tasks.
For dynamic analysis, CAESAR II converts each piping element from a continuous beam element between two nodes to a
stiffness between two masses. Additional stiffness is added at the mass (node) points to model anchors, restraints, hangers,
and other supports in the static analysis model. The masses assigned to each node are one half the sum of all element masses
framing into the node. These masses are used as translational inertias only. Rotational moments of inertia are ignored in the
dynamic mass model. (Their inclusion in the analysis would cause a large increase in solution time without a corresponding
improvement in the general accuracy of the analysis.)
In many instances the mass and stiffness established in the static model will be used without modification in the dynamic
analysis. Some situations, however, can be improved by the deletion of mass points or degrees of freedom. Usually this
occurs in analyses where the “unnecessary” masses are far from the area of interest in the model or where the “unnecessary”
degrees of freedom do not act in the direction of interest. Some piping systems have supports that are installed to suppress
vibration and do not effect the static analysis. These shock absorbers or snubbers can be entered (if not entered in statics)
during the dynamic input as additional stiffness.
The major function of the control parameter list is to set the type of analysis to be performed: calculation of natural
frequencies and mode shapes, harmonic analysis, spectral analysis, or time history. General settings for the analysis are also
defined in the control parameter list such as maximum frequency cutoff and mode summation methods. It is here, too, that
the static configuration for nonlinear restraints (if any) is defined, and the friction factor for including friction in the
dynamic run is entered (the default friction factor is 0.0, which implies that no friction stiffness will be used). The advanced
option allows the user to change the parameters governing the eigensolution (which does the modal extraction). These
parameters should only be altered under special circumstances.
Dynamic Analysis Input Processor Overview

Entering the Dynamic Analysis Input Menu
The dynamic input module allows the user to specify the dynamic loads imposed on the piping system.
To perform a dynamic analysis, the static model must first be created and error checked through the CAESAR II Input
processor. Usually the model is also run through static analysis before the dynamic analysis begins but this is not a
requirement unless nonlinear supports or hanger selections are included in the model. If nonlinear supports are present the
static analysis must be run and the results made available before the dynamic analysis can be performed.
To enter the dynamics input, the proper job name must be current prior to selecting the Analysis-Dynamics file options of
the Main Menu.
Analysis-Dynamics Option
Upon entering the dynamic input processor, the following screen appears.
Dynamic Input Processor

The type of analysis is indicated in the drop down list in the upper left portion of the screen (new jobs default to Other).
Input data is organized in pages according to type. Users can access these pages by selecting their title tabs. After data is
entered, the job can be saved, error checked only, or analyzed, using the menu commands or toolbars.
A variety of dynamic analysis options are available and require different types of input. To simplify the input process, the
user should select the analysis from the drop list. Once selected, the input screen changes to reflect the required inputs.
Dynamic Analysis Type Specification

Available commands during dynamic input processing are:
Button Description
File-Save Input Saves the current input data.
Checks the input data for errors or inconsistencies.
File-Check Input
Starts the dynamic analysis.
File-Run Analysis
Adds a new data line on the current input page (tab page).
Edit-Add Entry
Deletes the selected data lines on the current input page.
Edit-Delete Entry
Allows the user to generate a file containing a Dynamic Load Factor vs. Frequency Spectrum from a
DLF Spectrum Generator Force vs. Time profile.
Provides a utility for estimating loads, flows, and other results for gas or liquid relief valves.
Tools-Relief Load Synthesis
Used to enter data points for user-defined spectra.
Tools-Spectrum Data Points
Input Overview Based on Analysis Category

The multitude of dynamic analysis types available in CAESAR II can be somewhat intimidating at first. Selection of Analysis
Type from the pull down list displays only those tabs for which input is appropriate. Those items are discussed by analysis
type.
Modal
Specifying the Loads
Modal analysis simply extracts natural frequencies and shapes for the system’s modes of vibration. Therefore no loadings
need to be or may be specified.
Lumped Masses
On this page, the user may add or delete mass from the mass model. Extra mass which may have been ignored as
insignificant in the static model (e.g. a flange pair) can be directly entered here. Also weights modeled as downward acting
concentrated forces, must be added here (CAESAR II does not assume that concentrated forces are system weights, i.e.,
forces due to gravity acting on a mass). Masses may also be deleted from the static mass model; this is the same as deleting
degrees-of-freedom. For the most part, mass deletion is a tool used to economize the analysis. If the system response to
some dynamic load is isolated to specific sections of the piping system, other sections of the system may be removed from
the dynamic model by removing their mass. Mass can also be deleted selectively for any of the three global coordinate
directions when deletion of directional degrees-of-freedom is desired.
For example, if a piping system includes a structural frame which supports the weight (the piping rests on the structure and
is connected to the structure only in the Y direction), these two systems (piping and structure) are independent of each other
in the X and Z directions, so the X and Z mass of the structure can be removed without affecting the piping model’s results.
With the X and Z masses removed, the calculations for the piping structural model proceed much faster.
Snubbers
Snubbers
Certain supports, called snubbers, only resist dynamic loading, while allowing static displacement, such as that due to
thermal growth. It is on this page that snubbers can be included in the model. Snubbers must have their stiffness explicitly
entered (they do not default to rigid, since snubbers are typically not as stiff as other types of restraints).
Note: Snubbers may also be entered in the input processor rather than in the dynamic processor.
Control Parameters
Control Parameters
These parameters describe how the analysis will be conducted. In general, this page would be used to set the number of
modes of vibration to extract by specifying a maximum number, a cutoff frequency, or both. Details on these entries are
discussed in the Technical Reference Manual.
Advanced Parameters Show Screen

These parameters rarely need to be changed by the user. For more information, see the Technical Reference Manual.
Harmonic
Harmonic Loads - Excitation Frequency

Harmonic load definition is broken down into two parts: 1) definition of the excitation fraudulency or frequencies and 2)
location and magnitude of the force and/or displacement load(s). Three input tabs are available for specifying the loads.
Any number of individual frequencies, or frequency ranges (indicated by a starting, ending, and incremental frequency) may
be specified, one to a line. CAESAR II performs a separate analysis for each frequency requested.
Note The number of anticipated load cycles may be entered for each frequency range. If the number is entered, the load
cases are calculated with a fatigue stress type. Otherwise, the load cases are calculated with an occasional stress type.
Harmonic loads may be specified on the Harmonic Forces or Harmonic Displacements input tabs. These pages allow the
user to enter loads (either force or displacement), direction, phase angle and node(s).
Harmonic Forces
Harmonic Displacements
Phasing can be important if more than one force or displacement is included. The phase angle (entered in degrees) relates
the timing of one load to another. For example, if two harmonic loads are acting along the same line but at different nodes,
the loads can be directed towards each other (i.e. in opposite directions), which would produce no net dynamic imbalance
on the system, or the loads could be directed in the same direction (i.e. to the right or to the left together), which would
produce a net dynamic imbalance in the system equal to the sum of the two forces. It is the phase angle, which primarily
determines this relationship. The harmonic load data
1500 X 0 10
1500 X 0 105
produces an “in phase,” or same direction dynamic load in the system (1500 lbf. in the X direction and zero phase at nodes
10 and 105), while
1500 X 0 10
1500 X 180 105
produces an “out of phase,” or opposite direction dynamic load on the system, which will tend to pull the system apart. The
two most common phased loadings are those due to rotating equipment and reciprocating pumps.
Rotating equipment may have an eccentricity, a speed, and a mass. These items must be converted into a harmonic load that
acts on the rotor at the theoretical mass centerline. The magnitude of the harmonic load is computed from:
Fn = (mass)(speed)2(eccentricity),
where (speed) is the angular velocity of the shaft in cycles per second. This load is applied along both axes perpendicular to
the shaft axis and at a 90º phase shift.
In the case of a reciprocating pump, the pump introduces a pressure wave into the line at some regular interval that is related
to the valving inside the pump and the pump speed. This pressure wave moves away from the pump at the speed of sound in
the fluid. These pressure waves will cause loads at each bend in the piping system. The load on each subsequent elbow in
the system starting from the first elbow will be phase shifted by an amount that is a function of the distance between the
elbows, from the first elbow to the current elbow. It is the amount of phase shift between elbow-elbow pairs that produces
the net unbalanced dynamic load in the piping. The phase shift, in degrees from the first elbow, is calculated from
phase = [(frequency)(length) / (speed of sound)]360º
where frequency is the frequency of wave introduction at the pump, and length is the distance from the first elbow to the
current elbow under study. The magnitude of the pressure load at each elbow is
Harmonic Force = 0.5 (Pressure variation) (Area)
Note All specified loads are considered to act together (with phasing considerations) at each applied frequency.
Modifying Mass and Stiffness Model

Lumped masses and snubbers are modified in the same way as described for Modal Analysis.
Control Parameters
Harmonic Control Parameters

These parameters describe how the analysis will be conducted. Undamped harmonic analysis may be done by setting
damping to 0.0. Details of these fields are discussed in the Technical Reference Manual.
Earthquake (Spectrum)
Earthquake loads are defined by defining one or more response spectra and applying them in a specified direction over part
or all of the piping system.
Spectrum Definitions
Response spectrum table values can be entered directly or built and stored as a file for use by CAESAR II. Data stored in a
file can be referenced by any job run on the machine. In either case, for a response table to be used by CAESAR II it must
first be defined in the Spectrum Definitions page.
There are two parts to the shock definition - 1) the statement of the name and type of data and 2) the table of actual
spectrum data points. The Spectrum Wizard also serves this purpose -providing the spectrum definitions and data points.
If the spectrum data is to be read from a file, the second part of the shock definition is not necessary. Spectrum Definition
describes the type of data in the spectrum (period or frequency vs. Force Multiplier/DLF, Acceleration, Velocity, or
Displacement) as well as the interpolation method for each axis. In order to define a spectrum, the user should add a blank
line.
Note To indicate that the spectrum is to be read from a file the symbol “#” should immediately precede the spectrum
name. (The name of the file is the name of the spectrum, without the “#” symbol, and no extension is allowed.) Subsequent
references to that spectrum do not use the “#” symbol.
Note The Spectrum Wizard automates common shock definitions, for more information refer to the DLF/Spectrum
Generator - The Spectrum Wizard section later in this chapter.
If not read in from a file, the data points for a user-entered spectrum may be entered by using the Tools - Spectrum Data
Points command, selecting the spectrum name, and entering the data.
Likewise, clicking the Read From File button will read in data from any text file set up with two entries per range.
Data Points
CAESAR II also has several shock spectra built in. These spectra may be used as part of a shock load case without further
input.
ELCENTRO - Based on the May 18, 1940 El Centro California earthquake N-S component, and applies to elastic systems
with 5-10% damping. Values are taken from Biggs - Introduction to Structural Dynamics.
1.60H.5 - U. S. Atomic Energy Commission Regulatory Guide 1.60 Rev. 1, Dec. 1973 Horizontal Design Response Spectra
for 0.5% critically damped systems.
1.60H2 - Other AEC horizontal spectra for 2, 5, 7 and 10% critically damped systems.
1.60H5
1.60H7
1.60H10
1.60V.5 - Other AEC vertical spectra for 0.5, 2, 5, 7 and 10% critically damped systems.
1.60V2
1.60V5
1.60V7
1.60V10
UBCSOIL1 - Spectra from Uniform Building Code, 1991, soil type 1
UBCSOIL2 - Spectra from Uniform Building Code, 1991 soil type 2

UBCSOIL3 - Spectra from Uniform Building Code, 1991 soil type 3
Note: Use of the Reg. Guide 1.60 or UBC spectra requires the input of the ZPA (zero period acceleration) in the Control
Parameters. This is the maximum ground acceleration at the site and is used to scale the spectrum curves. The default ZPA
is 0.5g.
Spectrum Load Cases
Spectrum Load Cases

Load cases consist of simultaneously applied spectra. Each spectrum in the shock case is assigned a direction and factor. For
earthquakes, the “direction” input defines the orientation of the uniform inertial loading (commonly earthquakes have 3
direction components: X, Y, and Z). The “factor” is used to modify the magnitude of the shock. For example, the seismic
evaluation of a piping system might include two Spectrum/Time History Load Cases: 1) 1.0 (100%) times of the El Centro
spectrum in the X direction and 0.67 (67%) times of the El Centro spectrum in the Y direction and 2) 1.0 in Z and 0.67 in Y.
CAESAR II also supports options for independent support motion earthquakes. Here, parts of the system are exposed to
different shocks. An example is a piping system supported both from ground and building supports. Because the building
will filter the earthquake, supports attached to the building will not be exposed to the same shock as the supports attached to
the ground. In this case two different shock inputs are required, one for the ground supports, and one for the building
supports. To specify an independent support motion shock the node range that defines a particular group of supports must
be given. Additionally, the maximum displacement (seismic anchor movements) of the support attachment point must be
specified.
The example below shows first a typical uniform support earthquake specification, and second a typical independent
support motion earthquake:
* UNIFORM SUPPORT MOTION EARTHQUAKE INPUT
ELCENTRO 1 X
ELCENTRO 1 Z
ELCENTRO .667 Y
* INDEPENDENT SUPPORT MOTION EARTHQUAKE INPUT
HGROUND 1 X 1 100 1 0.25
HGROUND 1 Z 1 100 1 0.25
VGROUND 1 Y 1 100 1 0.167
HBUILDING 1 X 101 300 1 0.36
HBUILDING 1 Z 101 300 1 0.36
VBUILDING 1 Y 101 300 1 0.24
The uniform support motion earthquake above contains only components of the El Centro earthquake acting uniformly
through all of the supports. There is a 33% reduction in the earthquake’s magnitude in the Y direction.
The independent support motion earthquake above has two different support groups: the 1-100 group, and the 101-300
group. The 1-100 group is exposed to a ground spectrum. The 101-300 group is exposed to a building spectrum. Different
horizontal and vertical components were given for both the ground and the building spectra. The last values specified are
the seismic support movements.
Stress types may be assigned to the spectrum load cases by selecting from the drop list. If the Fatigue stress type is selected,
the user should also enter the number of anticipated load cycles.
Static/Dynamic Combinations
Each shock case produces an output report listing displacements, forces, moments, and stresses. For stresses, however, most
piping codes combine the occasional dynamic stresses with the sustained static stresses. It is the sustained plus occasional
stress sum that is compared to the occasional allowable stress. This occasional stress combination is provided through the
Static/Dynamic Combinations page. Each combination references the static load case number and the dynamic load case
number to be combined. The static load case number identifies one of the static load cases (usually the sustained case) in
the static output.
In most cases this is static load case 4 if hanger sizing is included, or load case 2 if it is not. The numbers used to reference
the dynamic cases are set by the order of the dynamic load case input. Factors are specified with the static and dynamic case
numbers to increase or decrease the summed values. Any static/dynamic combination specified will produce an additional
dynamic output report. There can be any number of static or dynamic loads summed together in a single load case. Each
case to be added should be placed on a separate line. Both static only and dynamic only cases can be manipulated. There is
also independent control of the combination method. SRSS (Square Root of the Sum of the Squares) methods or ABS
methods can be used. The default is the ABS method. The input to sum 100% (1.0 times) of static case 2 with 100% (1.0
times) dynamic case 1 appears as follows:
S2 1.0
D1 1.0

Lumped Masses and Snubbers are modified in the same way as described for Modal Analysis.
Control Parameters
These parameters describe how the analysis is to be conducted. Particular attention should be paid to the modal summation
methodology Details are discussed in the Technical Reference Manual.
Advanced Parameters
These rarely need to be changed by the user. For more information see the Technical Reference Manual.
Relief Loads (Spectrum)

This method is set up to solve a relief valve loading through Force Spectrum Methodology. In order to analyze a piping
system for a relief valve loading, it is first necessary to estimate the force-time profile for the loading. This must then be
converted to a Force Multiplier (Dynamic Load Factor) spectrum. The applied force then must be applied in conjunction
with this spectrum.
Relief Load Synthesis
Relief Load Synthesis

If the user does not know the characteristics of the relief valve load, the Tools-Relief Load Synthesis Command provides a
calculation scratch pad based upon a model of a relief valve venting steam or liquid to atmosphere. This utility can be used
to estimate relief valve thrust loads, exit velocities, and pressures which can in turn be used to estimate the force vs. time
profile of the applied load. Once all data is entered, clicking the Calculate Results button performs the calculations. For
more information, see the Technical Reference Manual.
Means of estimating the Force-Time profile for a relief load are shown in the Applications Guide.
DLF/Spectrum Generator - The Spectrum Wizard

Several common shock definitions are based on just a few parameters. Supplying these parameters to the DLF/Spectrum
Generator or Spectrum Wizard will produce these shock definitions. Three sources for seismic spectra are used - the
Uniform Building Code, ASCE 7 and the International Building Code - to build period versus g load spectra. Two types of
force response spectra (dynamic load factor versus frequency) are also built here - the safety relief valve response spectrum
found in B31.1 and a general force response spectrum derived from the user's own time history.
Clicking the icon in the dynamic analysis input processor opens the Spectrum Wizard. This icon is identified in the
following illustration:
The following window appears:
Each of the five spectra may be selected using the radio buttons on the left side of the window. A default spectrum name is
provided but any valid file name, without blanks, may be entered in its place. Once the input parameters are entered, the
spectrum is built for the analysis by clicking the Generate Spectrum button. To exit this processor, click Done.
After clicking Generate Spectrum, the processor will display the spectrum data and await a user response - Save to File,
OK or Cancel. A completed shock spectrum is shown below:
Save to File
Saves the spectrum as a file with the same spectrum name in the current folder. Two files will be saved for the seismic
spectra, one horizontal and one vertical (distinguished by the suffix H or V at the end of the name). Be sure to specify a
unique spectrum name, as this processor will overwrite any existing files of the same name. It is not necessary to save the
spectrum data to a file to use the data in the current job. The OK button will do that. Use the Save to File button only if
you wish to reuse the data in other CAESAR II Dynamic analyses.
OK
By clicking OK, the processor will load the appropriate data in the Spectrum Definitions tab in the Dynamic Input and
move the data to the dynamic input. Once this processor is closed, the dynamic input will be updated; the spectrum
definitions will be listed and generated spectra can be reviewed by clicking the Enter/Edit Spectra Data button at the top
of the dynamic analysis input window.
Cancel
Clicking Cancel on this display will quit the display without loading the data into the dynamic input.
The specifics for each spectrum generator are discussed on the following page.
UBC
Selecting this option creates earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the 1997 Uniform Building Code.
Spectrum Name
This is the group name for the pair of seismic shock spectra that will be generated here. A suffix of H and V will be added
to indicate the horizontal and vertical spectrum, respectively. Once properly entered, these names will be listed in the
Spectrum Definitions tab and can be used to build Spectrum Load Cases. These names would also be used as data file
names if so requested. Do not include a space in the spectrum name.
The horizontal design response spectrum will be based on the curve shown in UBC Figure 16-3 (below). Ts=Cv/2.5Ca &
T0=Ts/5
The vertical spectrum will be set to 50% of I·Ca across the entire period range.
Importance Factor
This is the Seismic Importance Factor, I, as defined in Table 16-K. The calculated spectrum accelerations will be multiplied
by this value to generate the shock spectra. Values range from 1.0 to 1.25 based on the function of the structure.
Seismic Coefficient Ca
Based on soil profile type and seismic zone factor, this is the "Zero Period Acceleration" for the site as defined in Table 16-
Q. Table values range from 0.06 to 0.66.
Seismic Coefficient Cv
Based on soil profile type and seismic zone factor, this parameter sets the ground acceleration at higher periods (lower
frequencies) for the site as defined in Table 16-R. Table values range from 0.06 to 1.92.
ASCE7
Selecting this option creates earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the ASCE 7-02 Standard.
Spectrum Name
The horizontal design response spectrum will be based on the curve shown in ASCE 7-02 Figure 9.4.1.2.6 (below).
Ts=SD1/SDS & T0=Ts/5. Above a period of 4 seconds, the horizontal spectrum acceleration changes.
The vertical spectrum will be set to 20% of SDS across the entire period range. Neither I nor R affects the vertical
spectrum.
Importance Factor
This is the Occupancy Importance Factor, I, as defined in Table 9.1.4. The calculated horizontal spectrum accelerations will
be multiplied by this value to generate the shock spectra. Values range from 1.0 to 1.5 based on the function of the structure
Site Coefficient Fa
Listed in Table 9.4.1.2.4a, Fa is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped short period maximum considered
earthquake acceleration (SS). Table values range from 0.8 to 2.5. This value is used with the mapped short period
acceleration to set the response accelerations based on local soil conditions.
Site Coefficient Fv
Listed in Table 9.4.1.2.4b, Fv is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped 1-second period maximum considered
earthquake acceleration (S1). Table values range from 0.8 to 3.5. This value is used with the mapped 1-second period
Mapped MCESRA at Short Period (SS)

This is the mapped ground acceleration (the maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration) at the system
location for a structure having a period of 0.2 second and 5% critical damping where the probability of its exceedance over
50 years is 2%. Short period accelerations are defined in the maps of Section 9.4.1.2.
Mapped MCESRA at One Second (S1)

location for a structure having a period of 1 second and 5% critical damping where the probability of its exceedance over 50
years is 2%. One-second period accelerations are defined in the maps of Section 9.4.1.2.
Response Modification R
This is the Response Modification Coefficient, R, as defined in Table 9.5.2.2. The calculated horizontal spectrum
accelerations will be divided by this value to generate the shock spectra in accordance with Equation 9.5.6.5-3. This term
reflects system ductility. Values range from 3.0 to 8.0 for most plant structures and 3.5 for piping is not atypical.
IBC
Selecting this option creates earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the International Building Code 2000
Spectrum Name
The horizontal design response spectrum will be based on the curve shown in IBC 2000 Fig. 1615.1.4 (below).
Ts=SD1/SDS & T0=Ts/5
The vertical spectrum will be set to 20% of SDS (implied in 1617.1.2) across the entire period range.
Importance Factor
This is the Occupancy Importance Factor, IE, as defined in Section 1616.2 and shown in Table 1604.5. The calculated
spectrum accelerations will be multiplied by this value to generate the shock spectra. Values range from 1.0 to 1.5 based on
the function of the structure.
Site Coefficient Fa
Listed in Table 16.15.1.2(1), Fa is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped short period maximum considered
earthquake acceleration (SS). Table values range from 0.8 to 2.5. This value is used with the mapped short period
Site Coefficient Fv
Listed in Table 1615.1.2(2), Fv is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped 1-second period maximum considered
earthquake acceleration (S1). Table values range from 0.8 to 3.5. This value is used with the mapped 1-second period
Mapped MCESRA at Short Period (SS)

location for a structure having a period of 0.2 second and 5% critical damping where the probability of its exceedance over
50 years is 2%. Short period accelerations are defined in the maps of Section 1615.1.
Mapped MCESRA at One Second (S1)

location for a structure having a period of 1 second and 5% critical damping where the probability of its exceedance over 50
years is 2%. One-second period accelerations are defined in the maps of Section 1615.1.
Response Modification R
This is the Response Modification Coefficient, R, as defined in Table 9.5.2.2. The calculated horizontal spectrum
accelerations will be divided by this value to generate the shock spectra in accordance with Equation 9.5.6.5-3. This term
reflects system ductility. Values range from 3.0 to 8.0 for most plant structures and 3.5 for piping is not atypical.
B31.1 Appendix II (Safety Valve) Force Response Spectrum

Selecting this option creates a normalized force response (Dynamic Load Factor) spectrum for loads from a safety valve
discharge into an open system in accordance with the non-mandatory rules of B31.1 Appendix II - Rules for the Design of
Safety Valve Installations.
Spectrum Name
This is the name for the force response spectrum that will be generated here. Once properly entered, this name will be listed
in the Spectrum Definitions tab and can be used to build Spectrum Load Cases. This name would also be used as the data
file name if so requested. Do not include a space in the spectrum name.
The spectrum is based on the curve shown in B31.1 Appendix II, refer to Fig. II-3-2 (below).
Opening Time (milliseconds)

Enter the opening time of the relief valve.
User Defined Time History Waveform

Selecting this option creates a normalized force response (Dynamic Load Factor) spectrum based on a user-entered load vs.
time history.
Spectrum Name
This is the name given to the Force Response Spectrum created from the time history load defined here. Once properly
entered, this name will be listed in the Spectrum Definitions tab and can be used with Force Sets to build Spectrum Load
Cases. This name would also be used as the data file name if so requested. Do not include a space in the spectrum name.
Max. Table Frequency

Enter the maximum frequency desired for the force response spectrum about to be generated. This upper limit should be
beyond the peak of the dynamic load factors calculated here. Ideally, the maximum table frequency will show a constant
dynamic load factor of 1.0
Number of Points
Enter the number of frequency/dynamic load factor pairs to be generated for your data. A value of twenty is typical.
Enter Pulse Data

Clicking this button displays a table in which the time history of the event is defined. In the following example a
"trapezoid" event is defined - at time 0 there is no load, this load ramps up to full load of 1.0 (the load is normalized here) in
80 milliseconds; the load remains constant for the next 920 msec (at the time 1000 msec) and then ramps down to zero over
250 msec.
Generate Spectrum
Clicking this button will convert the time history into its equivalent force response spectrum in terms of Dynamic Load
Factor versus frequency (below). The buttons on this window perform the same tasks as those defined at the start of this
section.
Response spectrum table values can be entered directly or built and stored as a file for use by CAESAR II such as those
generated through the DLF Spectrum Generator. Data stored in a file can be referenced by any job run on the machine.
The Spectrum Wizard also serves this purpose -providing the spectrum definitions and data points. There are two parts to
the shock definition - 1) the statement of the name and type of data and 2) the table of actual spectrum data points. If the
spectrum data is to be read from a file, the second part of the shock definition is not necessary, instead, the symbol # should
precede the spectrum name to indicate that the data comes from a file on the hard disk. The name of the hard disk file is the
name of the shock spectrum without the symbol and without an extension; it must be located in the same directory as the
piping job.
Note The Spectrum Wizard automates common shock definitions, for more information refer to the DLF/Spectrum
Generator - The Spectrum Wizard later in this chapter.
When using a file created by the DLF Spectrum Generator, the user must tell CAESAR II the type of data which resides in the
file. (The actual file only contains a table of data points.) This will always be Frequency vs. Force-Multiplier data, with
linear interpolation) so a typical definition might look like
#TESTFILE FREQ FORCE LIN LIN
This line tells CAESAR II that there is a file containing spectrum table points on the hard disk by the name of TESTFILE,
the table is comprised of frequency versus force multiplier data, and is to be interpolated linearly.
Note The data in this file may alternatively be read in directly from the Spectrum Data Points dialog box. In this case
the "#" should be omitted from the spectrum declaration.
Force Sets
Force Sets
Force spectrum analyses, such as a relief valve loading, differ from earthquake analyses in that there is no implicit definition
of the load distribution. For example, for earthquakes, the loading is uniform over the entire structure and proportional to
the pipe’s mass. With relief valves (and other point loadings) the load is not uniformly distributed and is not proportional to
the mass. A water hammer load, for example, is proportional to the speed of sound and the initial velocity of the fluid. Its
point of application is at subsequent elbow-elbow pairs. Force spectrum analyses require more information than the more
common earthquake simulations. This information is the load magnitude, direction, and location. Forces are grouped into
like-numbered force sets when these forces occur together, or need to be manipulated in the analysis together. Typical force
set input might appear as
-3400 Y 35 1
-1250 Y 35 2
where the -3400 and the -1250 are clearly the loads, Y is the direction, 35 is the node number, and the 1 and 2 are the
respective load cases. This might indicate two different loading levels of one particular load.
For a skewed load, the force spectrum input might appear as shown below:
-2134 Y 104 1
-2134 X 104 1
This demonstrates multiple components in a single pulse spectrum set. (In the case above the pulse spectrum set number is
1). These forces obviously belong in the same force set, since different components of a skewed load always occur together.
Spectrum/Load Cases
Spectrum Load Cases

Spectrum Load Cases for force spectrum analyses are set up somewhat differently than Spectrum Load Cases for earthquake
analyses. The Spectrum Load Cases for force spectrum runs must link a Force Multiplier spectrum to a force set.
The load case definition consists of one or more lines on which a spectrum, scale factor (usually 1.0), direction, and force
set number is given.
TESTFILE 1.0 Y 1
Note The direction specified on this line does not need to be the direction of the load (which is specified in the force set).
This direction is used for labeling and designation of “independent” vs. “dependent” loadings.
More complex nuances of force spectrum load cases are discussed in the Technical Reference Manual. The complexity
increases as the number of components in the load case goes beyond 1, and as the time history phenomena being modeled
deviates from true impulse type loading.
This is discussed under Earthquake.

Control Parameters
Control Parameters
These parameters describe how the analysis is to be conducted. Particular attention should be paid to the modal summation
methodology. Details are discussed in the Technical Reference Manual.
Advanced
These rarely need to be changed by the user. For more information, see the Technical Reference Manual.
Water Hammer/Slug Flow (Spectrum)

Specifying the Load
This method of solving water hammer or slug problems is the force spectrum method as used for relief valve loadings,
except the relief load synthesizer is not necessary. The user estimates a Force-Time profile, then turns it into a Force
Multiplier spectrum, which is then linked to Force sets in the load cases. Means of estimating the Force-Time profile are
shown in the Applications Guide; subsequent steps proceed as described for Relief Loads.
Pulse Table/DLF Spectrum Generation

This is discussed under Relief Loads.
This is done in the same way as described under Relief Loads.
Force Sets
These are set up in the same way as described under Relief Loads.
Spectrum Load Cases

Development of the load cases is identical to that discussed under Relief Loads.
Static/Dynamic combinations are set up as discussed under Earthquake.

Time History
Time history analysis is used to solve the dynamic equation of motion for the extracted nodes of vibration, the results of
which are then summed to find the system results.
Specifying The Load

Loadings are specified in terms of Force-Time profiles and force sets. The Force-Time profile is used to define the load
timing; the force set is used to define the load direction and location. Either the profile or the force set can be used to define
the magnitude.
Time History Profile Definitions
Profile Definitions
Time history profiles are defined in a way similar to the definition of response spectra -- the profile must be given a name,
data definitions (which must be Time vs. Force), and interpolation methods. As for response spectra, the data must also be
defined-either directly or by reading in from a file (in which case the file name must be preceded by the “#” symbol). The
profile data may either be either be entered with actual forces, or normalized to 1.0 (depending on how the force sets are
defined).
One force-time profile should be defined for each load which hits the piping system (i.e., each independent point load). The
loading case consists of one or more force profiles which may create a staggered loading on the system.
Force Sets
Force Sets
Force sets are defined as described for Relief Loads. There should be one (or more) force set for each load profile defined.
Note If the force-time profiles were normalized to 1.0, the maximum magnitude of the loads should be entered here. If
the profiles were entered using their actual values, the force set values should be entered as 1.0.
Time History Load Cases

Time history load cases consist of the multiple linkages of force-time profiles to force sets, as described to Relief Loads.
Only a single load case may be defined for Time History analyses.
Note For Time History analysis, the direction entry is used only for labeling, rather than as an analytic input value.
This is discussed under Earthquake.
Modifying Mass and Stiffness Models

Lumped masses and snubbers are modified as described for Modal Analysis.
Control Parameters
Control Parameters
These parameters define how the analyses are to be conducted. Details are discussed in the Technical Reference Manual.
Advanced
These rarely need to be changed by the user. For more information see the Technical Reference Manual.
Error Handling and Analyzing the Job
Button Description
Reviews the entries on each page and notifies the user of any errors which must be fixed.
Check Input
Performs the error check, and then if no errors are found, performs the analysis. In this case, the next stop is normally the
Run Analysis output review.
Performing the Analysis

Each of the four dynamic analysis methods - modes, harmonic, spectrum, and Time History - has their own procedure for
producing results. All of these analyses, however, start in the same manner. Once the dynamic input is saved and checked,
CAESAR II follows an execution path similar to that found in Statics. The account number is requested if accounting is
activated, the ESL is accessed (limited run ESLs are decremented), the element and system stiffness matrices are assembled,
and load vectors are created where appropriate. For Dynamics, the system mass matrix is also generated. From this point the
processing progresses according to the type of analysis selected. Each of the four types of dynamic analyses are discussed
below.
Modes
Once dynamic initialization and the basic equation assembly is completed, CAESAR II enters the eigensolver. The
eigensolver calculates the natural frequencies and modes of vibration. Each natural frequency appears on the screen as it is
calculated. The elapsed time of the analysis is also listed with the frequency. The processor essentially searches for the
natural frequencies, starting with the lowest, and continues until the frequency cutoff is exceeded or the mode count reaches
its limit. Both the frequency cutoff and mode cutoff are dynamic analysis control parameters. The frequencies appear to pop
out in a random fashion, perhaps three in rapid succession and then one more several seconds later. The amount of time to
calculate (or find) these frequencies is a function of the system size, the grouping of the frequencies and the cutoff settings.
Eigensolution may be cancelled at any time, with the analysis continuing using the mode shapes selected up to that point.
After the last frequency is calculated, CAESAR II uses the Sturm Sequence Check to confirm that no modes were skipped.
If the check fails, the user may either return to the dynamic input or continue with the spectral analysis. (Sturm Sequence
Check failures are usually satisfied if the frequency cutoff is set to a value greater than the last frequency calculated.)
Eigensolver
After calculation, control is passed to the Dynamic Output Processor. Natural frequencies and mode shapes can be reviewed
in text format, or the node shapes can be displayed in and animated fashion.
Harmonic
For each forcing frequency listed in the dynamic input, CAESAR II performs a separate analysis. These analyses are similar
to static analyses and take the same amount of time to complete. At the completion of each solution the forcing frequency,
its largest calculated deflection, and the phase angle associated with it are listed on the screen. The root results for each
frequency, and the system deflections, are saved for further processing. Only twenty frequencies may be carried beyond this
point and into the output processor. When all frequencies are analyzed, CAESAR II presents the frequencies on the screen
and allows the user to select those needed (in terms of frequency and phase angle) for further analysis. This choice can be
made after checking deflections at pertinent nodes for those frequencies.
Selection of Phase Angles

Phased solutions are generated when damping is considered or when the user enters phase angles in the dynamic input.
For all “phased” harmonic analyses, the user is given a choice of selecting from 18 separate phase angle solutions,
(including the cycle maxima and minima) for each excitation frequency. Each separate phase angle solution represents a
point in time during one complete cycle of the system’s response. The primary difference between a solution with and
without phase angles is when phase angles are entered, there is no way of knowing beforehand just when the maximum
stresses, forces, and displacements are going to occur during the cycle. For this reason, the displacements and stresses are
often checked for a number of points during the cycle for each excitation frequency. The user must select these points
interactively when the harmonic solution ends. There will be a complete displacement, force, moment, and stress solution
for each frequency/phase selected for output. Since there are only 99 cases possible for any one harmonic output processing
session, the user with many excitation frequencies must use the interactive selection process judiciously. In most cases the
largest displacement solution will represent the largest stress solution, but this is not always guaranteed. The user is also
presented with the option of letting CAESAR II select the frequency/phase pairs offering the largest displacements on a
system basis. The displaced shapes for the remaining frequencies are then processed just like static cases with local force,
moment, and stress calculations. Control then shifts to an output processor identical to the static output processor. The out-
put processor also provides the user an animated display of the harmonic results. Users should remember that all harmonic
results are amplitudes. For example, if a harmonic stress is reported as 15200 psi, then the stress due to the dynamic load,
which will be superimposed onto any steady state component of the stress, can be expected to vary between +15200 psi and
-15200 psi. The total stress range due to this particular dynamic loading would be 30400 psi.
Spectrum
The spectrum analysis procedure can be broken down into three tasks - 1) calculate the system’s natural frequencies, mode
shapes, and mass participation factors; 2) using the system frequencies, pull the corresponding response amplitudes from the
spectrum table and calculate the system response for each mode of vibration; 3) combine the modal responses and
directional components of the shock.
The first part of the analysis proceeds exactly as with the modal analysis.
After the natural frequencies are calculated, system displacements, forces, moments, and stresses are calculated on the
modal level and combined. Once all the results are collected, the dynamic analysis output screen appears. The spectral
results may be examined here, and the user may also review the natural frequencies and animated mode shapes.
Time History
The modal time history analysis follows steps similar to a spectrum analysis. The modes of vibration of the system are
computed, the dynamic equation of motion is solved through numeric integration techniques for each mode at a number of
successive time steps, with the modal results being summed, yielding system responses at each time step.
The output processor displays one load case (and optionally, one load combination) with the maximum loads developed
throughout the load application. There also are as many “snap-shot” cases as requested by the user.
CH AP TER 9
Chapter 9 Dynamic Output Processing
In This Chapter
Entry into the Processor........................................................................... 9-2
Report Types............................................................................................ 9-5
Notes on Printing or Saving Reports to a File ......................................... 9-17
3D/HOOPs Graphics in the Animation Processor ................................... 9-18
9-2 Dynamic Output Processing
Entry into the Processor

The dynamic output processor is accessed directly following completion of the dynamic analysis, or it may be accessed
anytime subsequently from the Main Menu Output options.
Dynamic Analysis Output

There are four types of dynamic output results to process:
• Harmonic results
• Frequency/Modal results from a Mode-Only solution (this solution also exists if a spectrum solution was run).
• Spectrum results, from earthquake, waterhammer, and relief valve solutions
• Time History results

Harmonic results are reviewed using the static output processor, which is discussed in Chapter 7 (special notes on reviewing
harmonic results are presented later in this chapter). The other three solution types share the same dynamic output
processor. After entering this processor, a screen similar to that of the static output processor appears:
Dynamic Processor
The left-hand column shows the load cases that were analyzed. The top center column shows the reports available for those
load cases. The right-hand column shows General Results, or reports that are not associated with load cases.
For Spectrum analyses, the load cases listed constitute all of the Spectrum load cases as well as all of the static/dynamic
combinations. For Time History analysis, the listed loads are the “results maxima” case and each of the “snap-shot” cases
for the single Time History load case and each of the static/dynamic combinations.
The user can select the reports and the load cases to be viewed by highlighting one or more load cases (if necessary) and
simultaneously one or more reports (reports that display in the right-hand column do not require that the report is
highlighted to print). (Selection is done by clicking, CTRL clicking, and SHIFT clicking with the mouse.) These reports
can then be sent to a printer, printed to file, saved to file or displayed.
A number of commands are available from this screen:
Option Description
Opens a different job for output review. The user is prompted for the desired file; Modal/Spectrum results are stored in
File-Open *._s files, while Time History results are stored in *._t files.
Prints the selected reports.

Print
Writes the selected reports to file, in ASCII format.

Save
Allows the user to view animated motion. Modem and spectrum results allow animation of the mode shapes, while time
history analysis provides an animated simulation of the system response to the force-time profile.
Animate
Returns to the piping input processor.

Input
Allows the user to enter report titles for this group of reports
Title
Provides a summary of each dynamic load case including the spectrum name, scale factor, direction cosines, and node
View Load Cases range.
Displays the selected reports on the terminal. Each report selected is presented, one at a time, for inspection. Users may
scroll through the reports where necessary. Specific node numbers or results can be located and highlighted with the
View Reports
FIND (Ctrl-F) command. To move to the next report click the right-arrow button.
Provides the ability to send output reports directly to Microsoft® Word . This feature is activated when producing a report
and enables the use of all of Word’s formatting (font selection, margin control, etc.) and printing features. Users can
Microsoft t Word
append multiple reports to form a final report, by selecting the desired reports, clicking the button, closing Word,
selecting the next report to be added, clicking the button again, etc. A table of contents, is displayed reflecting the
cumulatively produced reports.
Report Types
There are two types of reports available from the dynamic output processor. There are those associated with specific load
cases (the Report Options shown in the center column) and those not associated with specific load cases (the General
Results in the right column).
Note For Modal analysis, there are no load cases, so the center column is blank
Reports associated with load cases are those associated with the spectral or time history displacement solution. The Report
Options are displacements, reactions, forces, moments and stresses.
Displacements
This report gives the magnitude of the displacement for each load case. For spectral results, due to summing methodology,
all displacement values in this report are positive. For time history analysis, the values are correctly signed.
The displacement report gives the maximum displacement that is anticipated due to the application of the dynamic shock.
For spectral analysis, note that all of the displacement values are positive. The direction of the displacement is
indeterminate, i.e. there will be a tendency for the system to oscillate due to the potential energy stored after undergoing
some maximum dynamic movement. The displacements printed are relative to the movement of the earth.
Restraints
This report gives the magnitude of the reactions for each load case. A typical entry is shown as follows:
NODE FX
5 716
649
2X(1)
The first line for each node contains the maximum load that occurred at some time during the dynamic event. The second
line for each node contains the maximum modal contribution to the load, and the third line for each node tells which mode
and loading was responsible for the maximum. This form of the report permits easy identification of the culprit modes.
The mode identification line is broken down as follows:
2 X (1)
mode load direction (load component)
For example, at node 5 the resultant dynamic load due to the shock was 716. The largest modal component (of the 716) was
649, due to mode 2, and produced by the first X direction component (either the first support motion set for displacement
response spectrum analysis or the first force set for force response spectrum analysis). This form of dynamic output report
allows us to know if there is a problem, and if there is, then which mode of vibration and load component is the major
contributor to the problem.
If the component shows up as a (P), then it was the pseudostatic (seismic anchor movement) contribution of the loading that
resulted in the major component of the response. If the component shows up as an (M), this indicates that it was the missing
mass contribution. A typical restraint report follows:
Local Forces
This report gives elemental forces and moments in the element local a-b-c coordinate system. The a-b-c coordinate system
is defined as follows:
This report gives elemental forces and moments in the element local a-b-c coordinate system. The a-b-c coordinate system
is defined as follows:
For straight pipe not connected to an intersection:
“a” is along the element axis (i.e. perpendicular to the pipe cross-section)
“b” is axY, unless a is vertical and then b is along X
“c” is axb.
For bends and elbows, and for each segment end:
“b” is to the plane of the bend
“c” is axb
For intersections, and for each segment framing into the intersection:
“b” is to the plane of the intersection
“c” is axb
Note: X indicates the vector cross product.
Force, moment, and stress reports are similar to restraint reports in that each has the maximum response, followed by the
modal maximum, followed by the modal maximum load identifier. All force/moment reports are setup to represent the
forces and moments that act on the end of the element to keep the element in equilibrium.
Global Forces
This report contains information identical to that given above for local forces except that it is oriented along the global X, Y,
and Z axes. A typical report follows:
Stresses
The stress report contains axial, bending, maximum octahedral, and code stresses as well as in-plane and out-of-plane stress
intensification factors. These reports contain mode, and modal maximum data as well. A typical report follows:
Forces/Stresses
This report is intended to be a brief summary of the forces and code stresses for a particular load case. This report contains
maximum responses only, the calculated stress, and it's allowable.
Cumulative Usage
This report is available only when there are one or more Fatigue Stress types present. Only one report is generated,
regardless of the number of Fatigue load cases selected. The report shows, on an element-by-element basis, the impact of
each load case on the total Fatigue allowable, as well as the cumulative impact of all simultaneously selected load cases. If
the total Usage Factor exceeds 1.0; this implies Fatigue failure under that loading condition.
The General Results reports comprise the following and are independent of the load cases selected. They are as follows:
Mass Participation Factors

This report gives one number for each mode and load direction for each dynamic load case. This value provides the user
with a “feel” for the effect the dynamic loading and the mass had on the particular mode. Neither the absolute magnitude
nor its sign has any significance, only the relationship between values for a single load case is important.
Natural Frequencies
Calculated modal natural frequencies are reported in Hertz and radians per second; period is reported in seconds.
Modes Mass Normalized

A mass normalization procedure is used to compute valued magnitudes for mode shapes. A number of programs use this -
\normalization procedure, and this report was generated to make it easier for CAESAR II users to compare their results to
other programs’ results.
Modes Unity Normalized

This report scales the largest displacement in the mode shape to 1.0, with all other displacements and rotations scaled
accordingly. This mode report is the easiest way to get a “feel” for the shape of the mode.
The example shows two mode shapes from a small job. Users should note that in the first mode the largest single
component is in the Y direction (which we would expect from the earlier participation factor report), and in the second
mode the largest single component is in the Z direction.
Note Unity normalized means that the largest displacement component in the mode is set to 1.0 and all other
displacement values are scaled accordingly.
Included Mass Data

The Included Mass Data report displays the percent of the total system mass/force included in the extracted modes, and the
percent of system mass/force included in the missing mass correction (if any) for each of the individual shocks of each of
the dynamic load cases. This value gives an indication of the accuracy of the total system response captured by the dynamic
model, with 100% being the difficult to achieve ideal.
The first 3 items displayed by the report are the Load Case, the Shock Description, and the direction cosines. The next item,
the % Mass Included, shows the percentage of mass active in each of the X, Y, and Z directions. Following the % Mass
Included is the % Force Active. This value is computed by taking the algebraic sum in each of the global directions, and
then applying the SRSS method to each of the three directions. (The sums of the three directions are added vectorally.) The
final column displays the % Force Added. This value is obtained by taking the % Force Active and subtracting from 100.
Input Listing
This report, which may be displayed or printed, lists the input for the piping model or for the dynamic input.
Mass Model
The Mass Model Report shows how CAESAR II lumped masses for the dynamic runs. The mass lumping report should
show a fairly uniform distribution of masses. Large or irregular variations in the values shown should be investigated.
Usually these large values can be reduced by breaking down exceedingly long, straight runs of pipe.
The mass lumping report shown below is very uniform in distribution and should produce a good dynamic solution. Note
that CAESAR II ignores rotational terms.
Boundary Conditions
The Active Boundary Condition Report shows the user how CAESAR II dealt with the nonlinear restraints in the job. It
shows which directional supports were included, which gaps were assumed closed, and just how friction resistance was
modeled.
Notes on Printing or Saving Reports to a File

The tabular results brought to the screen may be sent directly to a printer. To print a hard copy of the reports click
FILE-PRINT. To send reports to a file rather than the printer, the user should click the File-Save button. After initial
selection, the user is presented with a file dialog to select the name of the file. To change the file name for a new
report, the user should select FILE-SAVE AS.
Sends reports to Microsoft Word™. The reports display in Microsoft Word ™ where you can access Microsoft
Word’s feature set. All reports that are to be saved in the output file need not be declared at one time. Subsequent
reports sent to the file during the session are appended to the file started in the session. (These output files are only
closed when a new output device, file or printer is defined.) After closing the report, a table of contents is added.
3D/HOOPs Graphics in the Animation Processor

The Animation module allows users to view animated motion of the system for static displacements or various dynamic
movements. The mode and spectrum results, for example, allow animation of the mode shapes, while time history analysis
provides an animated simulation of the system response to the force-time profile.
The animation options can be accessed from the CAESAR II Main Menu, by going to the OUTPUT/ANIMATION and
selecting the appropriate animation type from the sub-menu choices. In addition, the animation processor can also be
activated from each of the individual STATIC/DYNAMIC OUTPUT PROCESSORS by clicking the View Animation button.
Animation of any type has identical set of buttons and menu choices (similar to ones described in the Piping Input Graphics
Processor) that will be described herein. Any relevant differences will be described below for each corresponding animation
type. Launching the Animation Processor causes the following dialog to display.
The piping model is shown in its default state (volume mode, isometric view, orthographic projection). For the convenience
of the user, it can be displayed in any of the defined orthographic views Front/Back, Top/Bottom, Left/Right, or Isometric
by clicking the corresponding buttons. Similar to the Input Processor Graphics, the model can be interactively rotated,
zoomed, or panned. Zoom to Window and Zoom to Selection options are also available.
Perspective or orthographic projections can also be set. Node numbers can be displayed by clicking the Nodes button. The
desired load case or mode shape can be selected from the corresponding drop down list. The frequency of the load case
associated with the animation is shown at the top of the view plot whenever the Titles option (available from the Action
menu) is activated.
The animated plot menu displays several plot selections. Motion and Volume Motion are the commands to activate the
animation. Motion uses the centerline representation while Volume Motion produces the volume graphics image. Each of
the motion options causes the graphics processor to animate the current plot. If the Node Numbers button is clicked, the
node number text is moved together with the corresponding node. Once the plot is “moving” on the screen, it may be sped
up, slowed down, or stopped using appropriate toolbar button. After selecting a different load case or mode shape from the
drop down list, the motion automatically stops. One of the motion buttons should be clicked again to activate the model
“movement”.
Print Motion option (available from the File menu) prints all of the vibration positions of the current mode. It is not
available for the Time History animation. For clarity purposes, it is recommended to use the single line (Motion) option to
generate the printouts. The Volume Motion option generates a printout which is often too cluttered to be useful.
Save Animation to File

The animated graphics can be saved to a file by clicking the Create an Animation File button. Alternatively, this option can
be accessed from the dynamic plot menu File/Save Animation. After activating this option, the standard Windows Save As
Dialog will display prompting the user to enter the file name and directory to save the files. By default the current file name
and current data directory will be used. There will be two files cremated an *.HTML file and a *.HSF file. To view the
saved animation, find the corresponding *.HTML file and double click on it within Windows Explorer. The corresponding
*.HSF file containing the animation routines will be displayed. The *.HTML file contains useful buttons to play or pause
the animation. The model can also be viewed at different orthogonal planes, or returned to the isometric view.
Note The *.HTML is an interactive file.
The first time a CAESAR II created .HTML file is opened with Internet Explorer or other Internet browser, the user will
receive a message requesting permission to download a control from Tech Soft 3D. The user should answer “Yes” to allow
the download, after which the image will display. Once the model appears, right-clicking the model will show the available
viewing options, such as orbit, pan, zoom, and/or different render modes. The image can be printed or copied to the
clipboard as necessary.
Note Internet Explorer 5.0 and earlier may not display the image properly. Since Internet Explorer 5.0 is no longer
supported by Microsoft, COADE recommends Internet Explorer 6.0 or later.
Animation of Static Results - Displacements

CAESAR II allows the user to view the piping system as it moves to the displaced position for the basic load cases. To
animate the static results, execute the Options/View Animation menu choice from the Static Output Menu. Alternatively,
clicking View Animation allows the user to view graphic animation of the displacement solution.
Static animation graphics has all the model projection and motion toolbar options described earlier. The load case can be
selected from the drop down list. The title consists of the load case name followed by the file name and can be toggled on
and off from the Action menu.
The Static Animation processor allows viewing of the single line and volume motion, controls the speed of the movement,
and the animation can be saved to a file as described above.
Note The static animation does not have much physical meaning behind it. This is just a “one-time” move produced from
the CAESAR II calculated displacements (from temperature growth, initial SUS system sag and/or any other related loads). It
is better to use the Deflected Shape button on the 3D/HOOPS Graphics view of the Static Output Processor toolbar. For
more information refer to 3D/HOOPS Graphics Tutorial for Static Output Processor, Deflected Shape.
Animation of Dynamic Results – Modal/Spectrum

This option allows the user to view the calculated modes of vibration that correspond to particular natural frequencies of the
system. It is available from the Dynamic Output Processor after running the Modal analysis.
After invoking the Modal animation type, the system is displayed in its default state. The animation screen display the same
toolbar options described earlier. Natural frequencies can be selected from the drop down list to animate the corresponding
mode shape. The title shows the natural frequency in Hz followed by the current file name and the date.
Animated graphics for a particular mode shape (frequency) can be viewed in a single line or volume mode motion with
speed control, and/or saved to an HTML file for later presentation as described above.
Animation of Dynamic Results – Harmonic

During the harmonic analysis, CAESAR II calculates the system response to the excitation frequency. This response can be
animated.
The Harmonics Animation module can be launched from the Harmonic Output Processor by clicking View Animation. The
system displays in its default isometric state. The animation screen displays the same toolbar options described earlier that
allow single line and volume motion as well as speed up and slow down options. Occasional cases corresponding to the
excitation frequencies may be selected from the drop down list. The title shows the currently selected frequency, file name,
and the date. The title may be disabled from the Action menu.
Animated graphics for each load case analyzed can be saved to an HTML file for later presentation.
Animation of Dynamic Results – Time History

The Time History animation module can be launched from the CAESAR II Dynamic Output processor by clicking View
Animation. The system displays in the centerline isometric mode. The model can be rotated, zoomed, or panned and can be
set to different orthographic projections. The current time history time step and the job name are shown in the title on the
top of the graphics view.
Note, due to complexity of the time history calculations and to decrease the animation time, the animation is only available
in centerline mode.
Note The SAVE ANIMATION TO FILE option is not available in the time history animation for the same reason.
An additional feature of the Time History animation engine is the Element Viewer. The Element Viewer dialog displays
specific element information for a given time step. After clicking the Element Viewer button, the Element Info dialog
appears displaying the nodal displacements, forces, moments, code stress, and SIF information provided for the current
element at a current time step. Clicking the Next >> or << Previous buttons will change the information to correspond to the
next or previous element in the system for the same time step.
There are several ways to animate the model using the Motion button; clicking the Next Step / Previous Step buttons,
jumping to the beginning or the end of the time history animation; or using the Time Slider.
Clicking the Motion button will start the animation, the current time step will be displayed in the title line, and the task bar
at the bottom of the animation graphics view will show the progress. The animation speed can be increased, decreased, or
stopped by clicking the appropriate toolbar buttons.
Clicking the Next Time Step or Previous Time Step button while the Element Info dialog is active will update the dialog
information for the current element for the next or previous time step. If the animation is stopped, this will advance or back
space the animation one step.
Clicking View Animation again after stopping the animation will continue the time history motion from the location (the
time step) where the animation was stopped.
Clicking the Plot the First Time Step or Plot the Last Time Step button will bring the animation to the beginning or the end
correspondingly.
Dragging the Time Slider to the appropriate time step. The bar’s position adjusts automatically as the animation progresses
or users can click on the slider with the left mouse button and drag it along the time-line to find the desired time step or to
see the model’s displaced shape. If the Element Info dialog is active, the highlighted element information is updated to
correspond to the current time step.
Time History Animation View with Element Viewer Dialog

Clicking the corresponding button can enable the node numbers however, it is recommended to have node numbering
disabled during operation of the animation processor. As the animated elements move, the node numbers are redrawn for
every position in the system thereby creating a blinking effect making it hard to follow the animation.
CH AP TER 1 0
Chapter 10 Structural Steel Modeler
In This Chapter
Overview of Structural Capability in CAESAR II................................... 10-2
3D/HOOPS Graphics............................................................................... 10-8
Sample Input............................................................................................ 10-10
Structural Steel Example #1 .................................................................... 10-11
10-2 Structural Steel Modeler
Overview of Structural Capability in CAESAR II
Structural Steel Frame

Start the CAESAR II Structural Element Preprocessor from the Main Menu by first opening an existing (or new)
structural file, and then using the Input-Structural command. The following screen appears:
Input - Structural Steel
Note Structural file names should be limited to eight characters (with no embedded spaces) since CAESAR II currently
is unable to include long file names in piping models. The structural file must also be located in the same directory as the
piping model.
Input is interactive/batch keyword. This is a method of input most familiar to the finite element/structural analyst and
probably not so familiar to the piping engineer. Those users not already familiar with “keyword type” input should pay
particular attention to the examples, and make liberal use of the help functions ([F1]).
The general input format is:
<keyword>, <parameter #1>, <parameter #2>, ..., <parameter #n>

or
<keyword>, <key1=n1>, <key2 = n2>, ..., <key3 = n3>
For example......
FIX 5 ALL Fixes node 5, all degrees of freedom
SECID = 1,W10X49Defines properties for section #1.
EDIM 5 10 DY=12-0Define vertical member from 5 to 10.
Example Input
Since many structures have a considerable degree of “repeatability”, there are various forms, options, and deviations of the
above commands to help the user generate large structural models quickly and easily. For the most part however, and albeit
with a little more time and effort, the above method of single element generation is well suited to most pipers’ needs.
The most commonly used keywords display below:
EDIM Define structural element

FIX Define structural anchor (ALL) or restraint
LOAD Define concentrated forces
UNIF Define uniform loads
SECID Define cross section properties
A full explanation of all keywords is included in the Technical Reference Manual.
To delete a command highlight it and click Edit-Delete Card.
New lines may be created by selecting a keyword command from the menu or from the toolbars.
Certain commands set parameters that remain set for all further element generations. DEFAULT sets the default section and
material ID, ANGLE sets the default element orientation, and BEAMS, BRACES, and COLUMNS set the default end
connection type.
The full AISC database with over 900 cross-sectional shapes is available on a “per-member-name” basis, additionally the
user may define any arbitrary cross sectional shapes. The proper database (either AISC77.BIN, AISC89.BIN, UK. BIN,
AUST90.BIN, SAFRICA.BIN, KOREAN.BIN, or GERM91.BIN) must be selected using the Configuration/Setup
Module before starting the construction of a structural model. Sections may be selected from a tree structure, grouping
sections by type.
Configuration/Setup
AISC names should be keyed in exactly as shown in the AISC handbook with the exception that fractions should be
represented as decimals to four decimal places, i.e. the angle L6X3-1/2X1/2 would be entered: L6X3.5000X0.5000.
Member end connection freedom is a concept used quite frequently in structural analysis that has no real parallel in piping
work. Several of the example problems contain free end connection specifications and should be studied for details.
Structural models may be run alone, or may be included in piping jobs.
To run a structural model alone:

1 After selecting a job name, enter the Structural Input processor using INPUT-STRUCTURAL from the Main Menu.
2 Enter the structural steel model and its loading use File-Save to exit model building, do error checking, and build
CAESAR II Execution files if there are no errors. After completing these steps return to the Main Menu.
3 Start CAESAR II up at the analysis level. Select the load cases to be analyzed. Do not use CAESAR II’s recommendations
unless a weight-concentrated load case is all that is needed.
4 When the analysis level finishes, enter the standard CAESAR II Output Processor. Displacements, forces, and
moments will be available for each structural element.
5 Run the Analysis Program to ensure that the most heavily loaded members still satisfy the code.
To include a structural model (or models) in a piping job:

1 Enter the structural steel input processor as described above.
2 Enter the structural steel model and its loading.
3 Use FILE-SAVE to exit model building, do error checking, and build the CAESAR II Execution files if there are no
errors.
4 Open the Piping Input file. After the piping model has been entered to the user’s satisfaction click Environment-
Include Structural Files.
5 From the Include Structural Files dialog use the Browse button to select the structural files to include in the piping
job.
6 Exit the preprocessor after all structural models have been properly included in the piping job.
7 Perform and error check of the model. Once error checking finishes without a fatal message, run the entire model. After
analysis, the structural elements are included in the piping output processor as though they were pipe, except that
stresses are not computed.
Note: A stand alone AISC Code Check Program is available to verify that forces and moments on standard structural
shapes do not exceed the various allowables as defined by the American Institute of Steel Construction.
3D/HOOPS Graphics
The 3D/HOOPS Graphics Engine in the Structural Steel Modeler is mainly used to verify the model geometry for
completeness and accuracy. An Interactive Command Generator allows user-friendly entering and updating of the element
data, along with a graphics view that instantly reflects any changes.
The Structural Steel Modeler 3D Graphics Engine shares the same general capabilities as the Piping Input Processor's
Graphics. It uses the same HOOPS Standard Toolbar that enables users to zoom, orbit, pan, and several other options
among them the ability to switch orthographic views and volume to single line mode.
The Structural Steel Graphics Engine can also show or hide the supports and restraints, anchors, the compass, node
numbers, and element lengths. The restraints may also be changed in size relative to the structural elements.
The geometry displays on the screen to the right when the user defines enough information. For example, using Method 2 -
Node/Element Specification Generator, if only NODEs (absolute coordinates of a point in space) are generated, nothing can
be shown. However, when ELEM is defined (to specify a single element between two points in space), the corresponding
graphical element displays. When using Method 1 - Element Definition EDIM (similar to defining elements in the
CAESAR II Piping Input Processor), the corresponding graphical element displays after the EDIM command is
completed. For more information and a comparison of the two methods, refer to the CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual,
Chapter 4 Structural Steel Modeler.
The Structural Steel Command Generator may be resized and/or disabled to allow the graphics to fill the entire viewing
area. It may also be docked on or off the main frame. Once docked off, it can be removed from the view or closed. To
show/hide (open/close) the Structural Steel Commands Generator, click VIEW-INPUT.
Just as the Piping Input Graphics does, the Structural Steel Modeler has a Change Display Option that enables users to
change the default colors for all steel elements and restraints. For more information refer to the discussion in the Piping
Input 3D Graphics Processor.
Note Loads, such as Uniform or Wind, are not available in plot/graphics mode in the Structural Steel Modeler.
An additional feature of the Structural Steel Modeler is its ability to flip the coordinate system, on the fly. All relevant
user-entered data is also modified to comply with the newly selected coordinate system, either Y-up or Z-up.
Sample Input
This section contains three Structural Steel Examples. These examples are presented so that the user can enter them into the
computer from the listed input. This is without question the best way to become familiar with the structural capability in
CAESAR II.
Structural Steel Example #1

Determine the stiffness of the structural steel support shown below. Use the estimated “rigid support” piping loads from the
piping analysis to back calculate each stiffness.

A U-bolt pins the pipe to the top of the channel at node 20. The piping loads output from the pipe stress program are:
F x= -39.0 lbs.
F y= -1975.0 lbs.
F z= 1350.0 lbs.
Select FILE-NEW from the CAESAR II Main Menu, click the Structural Input radio button and enter a job name (for
example SUPP). Then enter the CAESAR II Structural Steel Processor by selecting option Input-Structural from the
CAESAR II Main Menu. This brings up the blank data entry screen, ready to define the units.

At this time the user enters the keywords and parameters that define the model input. Input for the example is as follows:
The UNIT, MATID, SECID, EDIM, FIX, and LOAD structural element keywords display in the example below, for a full
explanation of keywords refer to the Technical Reference Manual.
UNIT ENGLISH.FIL
MATID 1 30E6 .3 11.6E6 36000. 0.283 ;SPECIFY MATERIAL
SECID 1 W16X26 ;DEFINE CROSS SECTIONS
SECID 2 MC8X22.800
SECID 3 L6X4X0.5000
EDIM 5 10 DY=144. SECID=1 ;DEFINE ELEMENTS
EDIM 10 15 DY=72. SECID=1
EDIM 15 20 DZ=70 SECID=2
EDIM 20 25 DZ=20 SECID=2
EDIM 25 10 DZ=-90 DY=-72 SECID=3
FIX 5 ALL ;SPECIFY SUPPORTS
;TRY A PLOT HERE
LOAD 20 FX=-39 FY=-1975 FZ=1350 ;SPECIFY LOADS
Input Structural Steel - Sample

The model can be checked and saved with the File-Save command. At this time the input is checked, and if no fatal errors
are found, the CAESAR II Execution files are written, and the model may be used in a piping analysis or analyzed by
itself. (For the purposes of this example the model will be analyzed by itself.)
When error checking has completed successfully, the user is returned to the CAESAR II Main Menu. When this is done,
the Analysis-Static menu option should be chosen. From this point, structural steel analysis is performed just like a piping
analysis.
Note: Don't forget to include F1 in the SUS load case.
Output from a structural analysis is comprised of displacements, forces, and moments. The desired results from the analysis
of SUPP are the displacements at node 20 of:
x = -9.63 in.
y = -0.44 in.
z = 0.88 in.
These displacements are excessive for a support which is to be assumed rigid in another analysis. The translational stiffness
for the support can be computed as follows:
Kx = 39.0 lb. / 9.63 in. = 4.05 lb./in ; Ky = 1975.0 lb. / 0.44 in. = 4488.64 lb./in.;
Kz = 1350.0 lb. / 0.88 in. = 1534.09 lb./in.

A support must be designed to limit the loads on the waste heat boiler’s flue gas nozzle connection. The maximum
allowable loads on the nozzle are:
Fshear = 500 lb. Faxial = 1500 lb.

Mbending = 5000 ft. lb. Mtorsion = 10000 ft. lb.
Check the piping and structure shown in the following four figures:

Piping Dimensions
Structure Nodes
Structure Dimensions
Select a job name (for example SUPP2) and enter the structural input processor as described earlier. The structural input
screen appears:

At this time the user enters the keywords and parameters (using menu options and/or toolbars) that defines the model input,
and adds them to the file using the Edit-Add command.
The UNIT, MATID, SECID, EDIM, FIX, and LOAD structural element keywords display in the example below, for a full
explanation of keywords refer to the Technical Reference Manual.
Input for the example is as follows:
UNIT ENGLISH.FIL
SECID 1 W24X104 ;DEFINE SECTIONS
SECID 2 W18X50
MATID 1 YM=29E6 POIS=0.3 G=11.6E6 DENS=0.283 ;DEFINE MATERIALS
ANGLE=90 ;COLUMN ORIENTATION
EDIM 230 235 DY=10- ;VERTICAL COLUMNS
EDIM 235 220 DY=13-10
EDIM 200 205 DY=10-
EDIM 205 210 DY=13-10
EDIM 245 250 DX=8.392- DY=10- ;SLOPED COLUMNS
EDIM 260 255 DX=8.392- DY=10-
EDIM 250 220 DX=11.608- DY=13-10
EDIM 255 210 DX=11.608- DY=13-10
DEFAULT SECID=2;MAKE BEAMS DEFAULT SECTION
EDIM 235 240 DZ=-2.5-
EDIM 240 205 DZ=-2.5-
EDIM 220 215 DZ=-2.5-
EDIM 215 210 DZ= -2.5-
EDIM 250 255 DZ=-5-
;THE FINAL SET OF HORIZONTAL BEAMS ALONG THE X AXIS HAVE A STANDARD
;STRONG AXIS ORIENTATION
ANGLE=0.0
EDIM 250 235 DX=11.608-
EDIM 255 205 DX=11.608-
;ANCHOR THE BASE NODES
FIX 245 ALL
FIX 260 ALL
FIX 230 ALL
FIX 200 ALL
At any time during input the user can generate plots of the model by executing OPERATIONS-PLOT. Once the user is satisfied
that the model is correct, exiting with File-Save command checks and saves the model. If no fatal errors are found, then the
CAESAR II Execution files are written. The model may now be used in a piping analyses or analyzed by itself. (For the
purposes of this example the model will be analyzed with a piping model.)
When error checking has completed successfully, the user is returned to the CAESAR II Main Menu. The user should
change the jobname to the name of the piping input filename (PIPE2 for this example) and enter the input for the piping
system to be analyzed.
The input for this job is shown below:

To connect the pipe to the structure, follow these procedures:

1 The user must tell CAESAR II the name of the structural steel file to include. From the Input Spreadsheet select the
Kaux-Include Structural Files Menu option. The Include Structural Files Dialog appears.
2 Enter the name of the structural steel model to be included (SUPP2), by typing or browsing for it.
3 Define the connectivity between pipe and structural nodes using restraints with connecting nodes. For the example
problem, the node 115 in the pipe model should be tied to node 215 in the structural model in the X and Z directions
similarly; node 120 in the pipe model should be tied to node 240 in the structural model. These connecting nodes may
be defined from the piping spreadsheet on any convenient element. Auxiliary field input for these two connections is
shown as follows:
Restraint Auxiliary Data

If the pipe and structure do not plot properly relative to one-another then either:
a) The connecting nodes were not defined correctly.

b) The CONNECT_GEOMETRY_THRU_CNODES directive was not set to YES in the Configuration/Setup
module.
The properly plotted pipe and structure is shown below:
Structural Steel Example #2 Plot

Once the pipe and structure are properly plotted relative to one-another, the piping input processor can be exited and error
checking performed. The error checker includes the pipe and structure together during checking. The execution files that are
written also include the structural data. In the output the pipe and structure are also plotted together and can only be
separated via the plot RANGE command.
The loads on the anchor at 5 are grossly excessive. The structural steel frame and pipe support structure as shown are not
satisfactory. Some displaced shape plots from the analysis are shown in the next figure:
Plot Showing Displacement

In this example, displacement of the structure is small relative to the displacement of the pipe. The pipe is thermally
expanding out away from the boiler nozzle and down, away from the boiler nozzle.
Plot Showing Displacement

Using the RANGE command the structure is plotted without the pipe. The displaced shape of the structure shows that the
pipe is pulling the structure in the positive X direction at the top support and pushing the structure in the negative X
direction at the bottom support. These displacements will only result in higher loads on the boiler nozzle. The vertical
location of the structural supports should be studied more closely.
Perhaps vertical springs at 30 and 35 would help, along with a repositioning of the structural supports vertically, i.e. the
support at 120 should be moved down so that its line of action in the X direction more closely coincides with the center line
of the pipe between 25 and 40.

Estimate the X, Y, and Z stiffness of the structure at the point 1000. (Note that, in general, the stiffness of a three-
dimensional structure, condensed down to the stiffness of a single point, must be represented by a 6 6 stiffness matrix. As a
first estimate, only the on-diagonal, translational stiffnesses are often estimated, as is being done here.)

Select a job name (for example SUPP3) and enter the structural input processor as described earlier. The structural input
screen appears.
At this time the user enters the keywords and parameters (using menu commands and/or toolbars) that define the model
input. Input for the example is shown below:
Example Input
At any time during input the user can generate plots of the model executing Operations-Plot. Once the user is satisfied that
the model has been entered properly, the model can be checked and saved with the File-Save command. If no fatal errors are
found, then the CAESAR II execution files are written. The model may now be used in a piping analysis or analyzed by
itself. (For the purposes of this example the model will be analyzed by itself.)
The structural input processor generates a number of lists to be used for documentation and checking. Click the List
Options tab for various list types.
Of particular interest in this model is the element orientation data that shows that the columns strong axis was indeed rotated
90 degrees. Also the free-end-connection lists show that the specification entered for the beams produced the desired results.
Elements and Properties

Nodal Fixities
Nodal Loads
Element Material Data

Element Geometry Data

Element of Orientation Data

When error checking has completed successfully, the user is returned to the CAESAR II Main Menu. The user should
change the current jobname to that of the structural filename. When this is done the Analysis-Static menu option should be
selected. From this point structural steel analysis is performed just like a piping analysis. Output from a structural analysis is
comprised of displacements, forces, and moments.
The displacement and force report for the (Force Only) load case follows. Note that the structure is stiffer in the X direction,
even though the Z dimension is greater due to the orientation of the columns. The Force/Moment report is particularly
interesting given that all of the beams have pinned ends. Note that most of the beams carry no load. This is because the
transfer of the load to the beams in this model is due to rotations at the column ends, and not translations. (Cross-braces
would eliminate this problem and cause the beams to pick up more of the load.) The 1000 end of the elements from 20-1000
and from 40-1000 carries a moment because it is not a pinned end connection. 1000 is just a point at midspan for the
application of the load.
CH AP TER 1 1
Chapter 11 Buried Pipe Modeling
In This Chapter
CAESAR II Underground Pipe Modeler ................................................. 11-2
Using the Underground Pipe Modeler ..................................................... 11-3
Notes on the Soil Model .......................................................................... 11-9
Recommended Procedures....................................................................... 11-11
Original Unburied Model ........................................................................ 11-12
11-2 Buried Pipe Modeling
CAESAR II Underground Pipe Modeler

The CAESAR II Underground Pipe Modeler is designed to simplify user input of buried pipe data. To achieve this
objective the Modeler performs the following functions for users:
Allows the direct input of soil properties. The Modeler contains the equations for buried pipe stiffnesses that are
outlined later in this chapter. These equations are used to calculate first the stiffnesses on a per length of pipe basis, and
then generate the restraints that simulate the discrete buried pipe restraint.
Breaks down straight and curved lengths of pipe to locate soil restraints. CAESAR II uses a zone concept to break down
straight and curved sections. Where transverse bearing is a concern (near bends, tees, and entry/exit points), soil
restraints are located in close proximity and where axial load dominates, soil restraints are spaced far apart.
Allows the direct input of user-defined soil stiffnesses on a per length of pipe basis. Input parameters include axial,
transverse, upward, and downward stiffnesses, as well as ultimate loads. Users can specify user-defined stiffnesses
separately, or in conjunction with CAESAR II’s automatically generated soil stiffnesses.
Using the Underground Pipe Modeler

Users can start the Buried Pipe Modeler by selecting an existing job, and then choosing Input-Underground from the
CAESAR II Main Menu. The Modeler is designed to read a standard CAESAR II Input Data File that describes the
basic layout of the piping system as if it was not buried. From this basic input CAESAR II creates a second input data file that
contains the buried pipe model. This second input file typically contains a much larger number of elements and restraints
than the first job. The first job that serves as the “pattern” is termed the original job. The second file that contains the
element mesh refinement and the buried pipe restraints is termed the buried job. CAESAR II names the buried job by
appending a “B” to the name of the original job.
Note The original job must already exist and serves as the pattern for the buried pipe model building. The modeler
removes any restraints in the buried section during the process of creating the buried model. Any additional restraints can be
entered in the resulting buried model. The buried job, if it exists, is overwritten by the successful generation of a buried
pipe model. It is the buried job that is eventually run to compute displacements and stresses.
When the Buried Pipe Modeler is initially started, the following screen appears:
This spreadsheet is used to enter the buried element descriptions for the job. The buried element description spreadsheet
serves several functions:
• allows users to define which part of the piping system is buried.

• allows users to define mesh spacing at specific element ends.
• allows the input of user-defined soil stiffnesses
Typical buried pipe displacements are considerably different than similar above ground displacements. Buried pipe deforms
laterally in areas immediately adjacent to changes in directions (i.e. bends and tees). In areas far removed from bends and
tees the deformation is primarily axial. The optimal size of an element (i.e. the distance between a single FROM and a TO
node) is very dependent on which of these deformation patterns is to be modeled Not having a continuous support model,
CAESAR II or the user, must locate additional point supports along a line to simulate this continuous support. So for a given
stiffness per unit length, either many, closely spaced, low stiffness supports are added or a few, distant and high stiffness
supports are added. Where the deformation is “lateral”, smaller elements are needed to properly distribute the forces from
the pipe to the soil. The length over which the pipe deflects laterally is termed the “lateral bearing length” and can be
calculated by the equation:
Lb = 0.75( ) [4EI/Ktr] 0.25
Where:
E = Pipe modulus of elasticity

I = Pipe moment of inertia
Ktr = Transverse soil stiffness on a per length basis, (defined later)
CAESAR II places three elements in the vicinity of this bearing span to properly model the local load distribution. The
bearing span lengths in a piping system are called the Zone 1 lengths. The axial displacement lengths in a piping system are
called the Zone 3 lengths, and the intermediate lengths in a piping system are called the Zone 2 lengths. Zone 3 element
lengths (to properly transmit axial loads) are computed by 100*Do, where Do is the outside diameter of the piping. The
Zone 2 mesh is comprised of up to 4 elements of increasing length; starting at 1.5 times the length of a Zone 1 element at its
Zone 1 end, and progressing in equal increments to the last which is 50*Do long at the Zone 3 end. A typical piping system,
and how CAESAR II views this “element breakdown” or “mesh distribution” is illustrated on the following page.
Zone Definitions
A critical part of the modeling of an underground piping system is the proper definition of Zone 1 (or lateral) bearing
regions. These regions primarily occur:
• On either side of a change in direction

• For all pipes framing into an intersection
• At points where the pipe enters or leaves the soil
CAESAR II automatically puts a Zone 1 mesh gradient at each side of the pipe framing into an elbow.
Note It is the user’s responsibility to tell CAESAR II where the other Zone 1 areas are located in the piping system.
The left side of the Buried Element Description Spreadsheet displays below:
Buried Element Description Spreadsheet

There are 13 columns in this spreadsheet The eight not shown above carry the user-defined soil stiffnesses and ultimate
loads. The first two columns contain element node numbers for each piping element included in the original system. The
second three columns are discussed in detail below:
Soil Model No.—This column is used to define which of the elements in the model are buried. A nonzero entry in this
column implies that the associated element is buried. A 1 in this column implies that the user wishes to enter user defined
stiffnesses, on a per length of pipe basis, at this point in the model. These stiffnesses must follow in column numbers 6
through 13. Any number greater than 1 in the SOIL MODEL NO. column points to a CAESAR II soil restraint model
generated using the equations outlined later under Soil Models from user entered soil data.
From/ To End Mesh Type—A check in either of these columns implies that a lateral loading mesh should be placed at the
corresponding element end. For example:
FROM TO SOIL FROM TO
NODE NODE MODEL MESH MESH
5 10 2
The element 5 to 10 is buried. CAESAR II will generate the soil stiffnesses from user-defined soil dataset #2, and the node 5
end will have a fine mesh so that lateral bearing will be properly modeled. Since CAESAR II automatically places lateral
bearing meshes adjacent to all buried elbows, the user must only be concerned with the identification of buried tees and
points of soil entry or exit. The figure below is illustrative:
Lateral Bearing Mesh Definitions

Please note the following:

The user has separated the node numbers in the original piping system by 10’s or 20’s instead of the usual 5. This is so
that CAESAR II can maintain the sequence of node numbers for the added moves.
From/To Lateral Bearing mesh specifications are not needed for nodes 30, 110 and 130, since CAESAR II places lateral
bearing meshes on each side of a bend by default.
A lateral bearing mesh is not needed at 90 because there is no tendency for the model to deflect in any direction NOT
axial to the pipe.
The tendency for lateral deflection must be defined for each element framing into an intersection (node 50).
Commands available in this module are:
Button Description
Opens a new piping file as the original job.
File Open
File-Change Buried Pipe Renames the buried job (in the event that the user does not wish to use the CAESAR II default of “B” appended to the
Job Name original job name).
Prints the element description data spreadsheet.

File- Print
Allows the user to specify soil data for CAESAR II to use in generating one or more soil restraint systems. This is
Soil Models described in detail below.
Converts the original job into the buried job by meshing the existing elements and adding soil restraints. The
Convert conversion process creates all of the necessary elements to satisfy the Zone 1, Zone 2, and Zone 3 requirements, and
places restraints on the elements in these zones accordingly. All elbows are broken down into at least two curved
sections, and very long radius elbows are broken down into segments whose lengths are not longer than the elements
in the immediately adjacent Zone 1 pipe section. Node numbers are generated by adding “1” to the element’s FROM
node number. CAESAR II checks before using a node number to make sure that it will be unique in the model. All
densities on buried pipe elements are zeroed, to simulate the continuous support of the pipe weight. A conversion log
is also generated, which details the process in full.
Notes on the Soil Model

The following procedures for estimating soil distributed stiffnesses and ultimate loads should be used only when the analyst
does not have better data or methods suited to the particular site and problem. COADE’s soil restraint modeling algorithm is
generally based on the ideas presented by L.C. Peng in his paper entitled “Stress Analysis Methods for Underground
Pipelines,” published in 1978 in Pipeline Industry.
Soil supports are modeled as bi-linear springs having an initial stiffness, an ultimate load, and a yield stiffness. The yield
stiffness is typically set close to zero, i.e. once the ultimate load on the soil is reached there is no further increase in load
even though the displacement may continue. The two basic ultimate loads that must be calculated to analyze buried pipe are
the axial and transverse ultimate loads. (Many researchers differentiate between horizontal, upward, and downward
transverse loads, but when the variance in predicted soil properties and methods are considered, this differentiation is often
not warranted. Note that CAESAR II allows the explicit entry of these data if so desired.)
Once the axial and lateral ultimate loads are known, the stiffness in these directions can be determined by dividing the
ultimate load by the yield displacement. Researchers have found that the yield displacement is related to both the buried
depth and the pipe diameter. The ultimate loads and stiffnesses computed are on a force per unit length of pipe basis.
Button Description
The user enters soil data by executing the Soil Models Command. This option allows the user to specify the
soil properties for the CAESAR II Buried Pipe Equations.
Note Valid soil model numbers start with 2. Soil model number 1 is reserved for user-defined soil stiffnesses. Up to 15
different soil models may be entered for a single job.
Upon entry, the soil modeler dialog appears. Either the friction coefficient or the undrained shear strength may be left blank.
Typically for clays the friction coefficient would be left blank and would be automatically estimated by CAESAR II as
Su/600 psf. Both sandy soils and clay-like soils may be defined here.
The soil restraint equations use these soil properties to generate restraint ultimate loads and stiffnesses. (The
TEMPERATURE CHANGE is optional. If entered the thermal strain is used to compute and print the theoretical “virtual
anchor length.”) These equations are:
Axial Ultimate Load (Fax)
Fax = µD[ (2 sH) + ( p t) + ( f )(D/4) ]

Where:
µB= Friction coefficient, typical values are:

.4 for silt
.5 for sand
.6 for gravel
.6 for clay or Su/600
Su = Undrained shear strength
D = Pipe diameter
s = Soil density
H = Buried depth to the top of pipe
p = Pipe density
t = Pipe nominal wall thickness
rf = Fluid density
Transverse Ultimate Load (Ftr)
Where:
B= Angle of internal friction, typical values are:

27-45 for sand
26-35 for silt
0 for clay
OCM = Overburden Compaction Multiplier
If Su is given (i.e. have a clay-like soil), then Ftr as calculated above is multiplied by Su/250 psf.
Note that since in many cases the stiffer the soil, the more conservative the results, Ftr is multiplied by the OCM as well.
Many experienced pipeline engineers do not wish to add this "extra conservatism," and prefer to use values that are more in
line with those that have been used in the past. To do this, the OCM is the parameter that is usually adjusted.
Common practice has been to reduce it (from its default of 8) to values from 5 to 7, depending on the degree of compaction
of the backfill. Backfill efficiency can be approximated by the Proctor Number, defined in most soils textbooks. (The
Proctor Number is a ratio of unit weights.) The standard practice when the Proctor Number is known is to multiply the
default value 8 by the Proctor Number. This result should then be used as the compaction multiplier.
Yield Displacement (yd):
yd = Yield Displacement Factor x (H+D)
Note The Yield Displacement Factor defaults to 0.015.
Axial Stiffness (Kax) on a per length of pipe basis:

Kax=Fax / yd
Transverse Stiffness (Ktr) on a per length of pipe basis:
Ktr=Ftr / yd
Once the user clicks OK, the soil data is saved in a file entitled .SOI.
Recommended Procedures
The recommended procedure for using the buried pipe modeler is outlined below:
1 Select the original job and enter the buried pipe modeler. The original job must already exist, and will serve as the basis
for the new buried pipe model. The original model should only contain the basic geometry of the piping system to be
buried. The modeler will remove any existing restraints (in the buried portion). Add any underground restraints to the
buried model. Rename the buried job if CAESAR II default name is not appropriate.
2 Enter the soil data using Soil Models.
3 Describe the sections of the piping system that are buried, and define any required fine mesh areas using the buried
element data spreadsheet.
4 Convert the original model into the buried model by clicking Convert Input. This step produces a detailed description
of the conversion.
5 Exit the Buried Pipe Modeler and return to the CAESAR II Main Menu. From here the user may perform the
analysis of the buried pipe job.
A fairly simple buried-pipe example problem is shown in the following section. This example illustrates the features of the
modeler and should in no-way be taken as a guide for recommended underground piping design.
Original Unburied Model
The following input listing represents the unburied model shown above.
Terminal nodes 100 and 1900 are above ground. Nodes 1250 and 1650 (on the sloped runs) mark the soil entry and exit
points.
Soil Model Number 2, a sandy soil, is entered.

Elements 1250-1300 through 1600-1650 are buried using soil model number 2. Zone 1 meshing is indicated at the entry and
exit points.
Clicking Convert starts the conversion to a buried model.

The screen listing can also be printed.

The original unburied model is shown along with the "buried" model below. Note the added restraints around the elbows
and along the straight runs.
Note the bi-linear restraints added to the buried model. The stiffness used is based upon the distance to the next node.
Note that the first buried element, 1250-1251, has no density.
The buried job can now be analyzed.

CH AP TER 1 2
Chapter 12 Equipment Component and Compliance
In This Chapter
Intersection Stress Intensification Factors ............................................... 12-3
Bend Stress Intensification Factors.......................................................... 12-6
WRC 107 Vessel Stresses........................................................................ 12-10
WRC Bulletin 297 ................................................................................... 12-17
Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations ........................................................ 12-20
Remaining Strength of Corroded Pipelines, B31G.................................. 12-28
Expansion Joint Rating ............................................................................ 12-32
Structural Steel Checks - AISC ............................................................... 12-39
NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) .............................................................. 12-47
API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) .................................................................. 12-54
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors) ........................................................ 12-60
API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) .................................................. 12-62
Heat Exchange Institute Standard For Closed Feedwater Heaters........... 12-67
API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services) .......................... 12-68
The CAESAR II Equipment and Component Compliance Analytical Modules are executed from the CAESAR II Main
Menu using the Analysis Menu. Vessels, flanges, turbines, compressors, pumps and heat exchangers can be checked for
excessive piping loads in accordance with appropriate standards. Input is via tabbed spreadsheets, and help screens are
available for each data cell (launched with [F1] or the ? key). Output reports can be sent to the printer, terminal or files.
Often suction (inlet), discharge (exhaust), and extraction lines are analyzed for forces and moments in separate runs of a
pipe stress program. Once all of the loadings for a particular piece of equipment are computed, the equipment program is
executed to determine if these loads are acceptable in accordance with the governing code. The user enters the equipment’s
basic geometry and the loads on its nozzles computed from the piping program. The equipment analysis determines if these
loads are excessive.
One convenient feature of the CAESAR II Equipment programs is that nozzles on equipment can be analyzed separately.
Often times a user will only have suction side loads, and often the particular dimensions of the pump are unknown, or are
difficult to obtain. In these cases, CAESAR II accepts zeros or “no-entries” for the unknown data and will still generate a
“single-nozzle” equipment check report. Therefore, while overall compliance may not be evaluated, the user can still check
the individual nozzle limits. This is a valuable tool to have, as in this case the user is looking more for load guidance, rather
than for some fixed or precise limit on allowables.
12-2 Equipment Component and Compliance
Analysis Menu
All of these program modules share the same interface for easy transition. The individual modules are described following
section.
Intersection Stress Intensification Factors

With this module, intersection stress intensification factors (SIFs) can be computed for any of the three-pipe type
intersections available in CAESAR II:
Intersection Types
A sample input spreadsheet is shown below.
Intersection Stress Intensification Factors

Stress intensification factors are reported for a range of different configuration values.
Intersection Stress Intensification Factors - Report

Bend Stress Intensification Factors

This module provides a scratch pad for determining stress intensification factors (SIFs) for various bend configurations
under different codes.
Bend stress intensification factors can be computed for

Pipe bends without any additional attachments. These calculations are done exactly according to the piping code being
used.
Mitered pipe bends. These calculations are done exactly according to the piping code being used.
Pipe bends with a trunnion attachment. These calculations are taken from the paper “Stress Indices for Piping Elbows
with Trunnion Attachments for Moment and Axial Loads,” by Hankinson, Budlong and Albano, in the PVP Vol. 129,
1987.
The bend stress intensification factor input spreadsheet is shown below:
Bend Stress Intensification Spreadsheet

Input here is fairly straight forward; if there is a question about a particular data entry, the help screens should be queried. In
most cases data that does not apply is left blank. For example, to review the SIFs for a bend that does not have a trunnion,
the three trunnion related input fields should be left blank.
Bend Stress Intensification Factors - Trunnion

Pressure Stiffening
The pressure stiffening option in the input is provided so the user can see the effect that pressure stiffening has on the
bend’s flexibility factor and stress intensification factor. This option is controlled by the user in CAESAR II via the setup file,
but is most commonly left to the default condition. The default is different for each piping code because some of the codes
mention pressure stiffening explicitly and some do not.
Pressure stiffening has its most significant effect in larger diameter bends adjacent to sensitive equipment (compressors).
Including pressure stiffening where it is not included by default will draw more of the system moment to the nozzle adjacent
to the bend.
Flanges Attached to Bend Ends

This is essentially the number of rigid fittings that are attached to the end of the bend preventing the ovalization of the bend.
It is the ovalization that provides for a large amount of the bend’s flexibility.
BS-806 (The British Power Piping Code) recommends that flanges or valves (or any rigid cross-sectional fitting) that are
within two diameters of the ending weldpoint of the bend be considered as being attached to the end of the bend for this
calculation.
Bends with Trunnions

There are certain limits that must be satisfied before SIFs can be calculated on trunnions. These limits come directly from
the paper by Hankinson, Budlong and Albano, and they are:
t/T 0.2 and t/T 2.0

D/T 20 and D/T 60
d/D 0.3 and d/D 0.8
Where:
t = Wall Thickness of the Trunnion

T = Wall Thickness of the Bend
d = Outside Diameter of the Trunnion
D = Outside Diameter of the Bend
Stress Concentrations and Intensification

The stress intensification calculation for bends with trunnions is based on the relationship between the ASME NB stress
indices C2, K2, and the B31 code “i” factor (or stress intensification factor). That relationship has long been taken to be
(m)(i) = (C2)(K2)
Where:
m = multiplier, usually either 1.7 or 2.
i = B31 stress intensification factor
C2 = ASME NB secondary stress index
K2 = ASME NB peak stress index
The peak stress index (K2) is commonly known as the “stress concentration factor,” and is so-called in CAESAR II. Simply
put, this factor is the ratio of the highest point stress at an intensification (i.e. at an intersection or an elbow) and the nominal
local computed stress at the same point. Peak stresses typically only exist in a very small volume of material, on the order of
fractions of the wall thickness of the part.
Because most piping components are formed without crude notches, gross imperfections or other anomalies, the peak stress
index is kept well in control. Where a smooth transition radius is provided which is at least t/2, where (t) is the characteristic
thickness of the part, the peak stress index is typically taken as 1.0. At unfinished welds, sockets, and where no transition
radius is provided the peak stress index approaches values of 2.0.
Note If the user enters a trunnion (where there will be a weld between the trunnion and the elbow), and does not enter a
stress concentration factor (the third input for the trunnion), CAESAR II assumes a stress concentration factor of 2.0.
WRC 107 Vessel Stresses

The Welding Research Council Bulletin 107 (WRC 107) has been used extensively since 1965 by design engineers to
estimate local stresses in vessel/attachment junctions.
There are three editions of WRC 107 available from the program; the default is set by the user in the Configure-
Setup option.
WRC 107 Bulletin provides an analytical tool to evaluate the vessel stresses in the immediate vicinity of a nozzle. This
method can be used to compute the stresses at both the inner and outer surfaces of the vessel wall, and report the stresses in
the longitudinal and circumferential axes of the vessel/nozzle intersection. The convention adopted by WRC 107 to define
the applicable orientations of the applied loads and stresses for both spherical and cylindrical vessels are shown in the figure
below.
Spherical Shells Cylindrical Shells

: :
1. P-axis: Along Nozzle centerline and positive entering vessel. 1. P-axis: Along Nozzle centerline and positive entering vessel.
2. M1-axis: Perpendicular to nozzle centerline along convenient global axis. 2. MC-axis: Along vessel centerline and positive to correspond with any parallel
global axis.
3. M2-axis: Cross P-axis into M1 axis and the result is M2-axis.
3. M2-axis: Cross the P-axis with MC axis and result is ML-axis.
! : ! :
u—upper, means stress on outside of vessel wall at junction. u—upper, means stress on outside of vessel wall at junction.
l—lower, means stress on inside of vessel at junction. l—lower, means stress on inside of vessel at junction.
A—Position on vessel at junction, along negative M1 axis. A—Position on vessel at junction, along negative MC axis.
B—Position on vessel at junction, along positive M2 axis. B—Position on vessel at junction, along positive MC axis.
C—Position on vessel at junction, along positive M2 axis. C—Position on vessel at junction, along positive ML axis.
D—Position on vessel at junction, along negative M2 axis. D—Position on vessel at junction, along negative ML axis.
Note: Shear axis "VC" is parallel, and in the same direction as the bending axis
"ML." Shear axis "VL" is parallel, and in the opposite direction as the bending axis
"MC."
WRC Axes Orientation

It has also been a common practice to use WRC 107 to conservatively estimate vessel shell stress state at the edge of a
reinforcing pad, if any. The stress state in the vessel wall when the nozzle has a reinforcing pad can be estimated by
considering a solid plug, with an outside diameter equal to the O.D. of the reinforcing pad, subjected to the same nozzle
loading.
Before attempting to use WRC 107 to evaluate the stress state of any nozzle/vessel junction, the user should always
make sure that the geometric restrictions limiting the application of WRC 107 are not exceeded. These vary according to the
attachment and vessel types. The user is referred to the WRC 107 bulletin directory for this information.
WRC 107 should probably not be used when the nozzle is very light or when the parameters in the WRC 107 data curves
are unreasonably exceeded. Output from the WRC 107 program includes the figure numbers for the curves accessed, the
curve abscissa, and the values retrieved. The user is urged to check these outputs against the actual curve in WRC 107 to get
a “feel” for the accuracy of the stresses calculated. For example, if parameters for a particular problem are always near or
past the end of the figures curve data, then the calculated stresses may not be reliable.
WRC 107 can be activated by selecting ANALYSIS - WRC 107/297 from the Main Menu. The user may be prompted to enter a
job name, and then the following data entry screen appears:
Analysis - WRC 107

The input data is accumulated by the processor in four spreadsheets. The first sheet displays the title block, the second and
third sheets collect the vessel and the nozzle (attachment) geometry data, respectively. From the Vessel Data tab click the
WRC 107 radio button. The WRC 107 Version/Year and Use Interactive Control checkboxes can also be enabled from
this spreadsheet.
The Hot and Cold Allowable Stress Intensities of the vessel as defined per ASME VII, Division 2 can be entered manually
or updated from the Material Database by providing the Material Name and Operating Temperature in the corresponding
fields. Any allowable values entered manually or modified by the user, display in red.
Vessel Data
Nozzle Data
The nozzle loading is specified on the last spreadsheet, according to specific load cases, which include sustained, expansion
and occasional cases. These loads are found in the CAESAR II Output Restraint Load Summary under the corresponding
load cases or may be extracted from the static output files automatically by clicking the Get From Output... button. The
WRC 107 specific local input coordinate system has been incorporated into the program; so the loads may be input in either
the Global CAESAR II convention, or in the Local WRC 107 coordinate system. To enter loads in WRC 107 convention,
click the WRC 107 radio button. If the Global CAESAR II convention is used, the vessel and nozzle centerline direction
cosines must be present. Note, the positive direction is the Nozzle centerline vector pointing from the nozzle connection
towards the vessel centerline. The loads convention may be freely converted from global to local and back provided the
direction cosines are present.
Nozzle Loads (SUS)

Nozzle curves in WRC Bulletin 107 cover essentially all applications of nozzles in vessels or piping; however, should any
of the interpolation parameters, i.e. Beta, etc. fall outside the limits of the available curves, some extrapolation of the WRC
method must be used. The current default is to use the last value in the particular WRC table. If one wishes to control the
extrapolation methodology interactively, you may do so by changing the WRC 107 default from “USE LAST CURVE
VALUE” to “INTERACTIVE CONTROL” on the Computation Control tab located inside the Configure-Setup module
of the Main Menu or directly in the WRC 107 input file, on the Vessel Data tab.
After entering all data, the WRC 107 analysis may be initiated through the Analyze-WRC 107/297 menu option or by
clicking the Local Stress Analysis button on the toolbar. CAESAR II will automatically performs the ASME Section VIII,
Div. 2 summation.
Output reports may be viewed at the terminal or printed. Clicking the button, performs the initial WRC 107 calculation
and summation and sends the result to MicroSoft™ Word.
WRC 107 Stress Summations

Because the stresses computed by WRC 107 are highly localized, they do not fall immediately under the B31 code rules as
defined by B31.1 or B31.3. The Appendix 4-1 of ASME Section VIII, Division 2 (“Mandatory Design Based on Stress
Analysis”) does however provide a detailed approach for dealing with these local stresses. The analysis procedure outlined
in the aforementioned code is used in CAESAR II to perform the stress evaluation. In order to evaluate the stresses through an
elastic analysis, three stress combinations (summations) must be made:
Pm
Pm + Pl + Pb
Pm + Pl + Pb + Q
Where Pm is defined as the general membrane stress due to internal pressure removed from discontinuities, and can be
estimated for the vessel wall from the expression (PD) / (4t) for the longitudinal component and (PD) / (2t) for the hoop
component, where P is the design pressure of the system. The allowable for Pm is kSmh where Smh is the allowable stress
intensity (See the CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual for definition). The value of k can be taken from Table AD-150.1
of the code (which ranges from 1.0 for sustained loads to 1.2 for sustained plus wind loads or sustained plus earthquake
loads). Pl is the local membrane stress at the junction due to the sustained piping loads, Pb is the local bending stress
(defined as zero at the nozzle to vessel connections per Section VIII, Division 2 of ASME Code), while Q is defined as the
secondary stress, due to thermal expansion piping loads, or the bending stress due to internal pressure thrust and sustained
piping loads. The allowable stress intensity for the second stress combination is 1.5kSmh, as defined by the Figure 4-130.1 of
the Code, while Smh is the hot stress intensity allowable at the given design temperature. Both Pl and Q will be calculated by
the WRC 107 program. The third combination actually defines the “range” of the stress intensity, and its allowable is
limited to 1.5(Smc+Smh). See the Technical Reference Manual for a detailed discussion.
This summation is done automatically following the WRC 107 analysis. This calculation provides a comparison of the
stress intensities to the entered allowables, along with a corresponding PASS-FAIL ruling. Failed items display in red.
The WRC 107 Analysis module can provide a graphical representation of the nozzle and its imposed loads. This can be
accessed via the button on the toolbar.
WRC 107 Analysis Module

The displayed load case (SUS, EXP, and OCC) can be varied by selecting from the choices listed on the drop-down menu.
WRC Bulletin 297

Published in August of 1984, Welding Research Council (WRC) 297 attempts to extend the existing analysis tools for the
evaluation of stresses in cylinder-to-cylinder intersections. WRC 297 differs from the widely used WRC 107 primarily in
that WRC 297 is designed for larger d/D ratios (up to 0.5), and that WRC 297 also computes stresses in the nozzle and the
vessel. (WRC 107 only computes stresses in the vessel.)
The CAESAR II WRC 297 module shares the same interface with WRC 107. To enable the WRC 297 analysis, from the
Vessel tab, click the WRC 297 radio button. The module provides spreadsheets for vessel data, nozzle data, and imposed
loads. Vessel and Nozzle data fields function the same way as those in WRC 107. Currently WRC 297 supports one set of
loads. The loads may be entered in either Global CAESAR II convention, or in the Local WRC 107 coordinate system. If
Global CAESAR II convention is selected vessel and nozzle direction cosines must be present in order to convert the loads
into the Local WRC 297 convention as discussed in the WRC 297 bulletin.
Analysis - WRC 297

Nozzle Screen
WRC 297 - Loads

The CAESAR II version of WRC 297 also adds the pressure component of the stress using Lame’s equations, multiplied by
the stress intensification factors found in ASME Section VIII, Div. 2, Table AD-560.7. The pressure stress calculation is not
a part of the WRC 297 bulletin, but is added here as a convenience for the user.
Note CAESAR II also utilizes, through the piping input processor, the nozzle flexibility calculations described in WRC
297 refer to Chapter 3 of the Technical Reference Manual.
When provided with the necessary input, CAESAR II calculates the stress components at the four locations on the vessel
around the nozzle and also the corresponding locations on the nozzle. Stresses are calculated on both the outer and inner
surfaces (upper and lower). These stress components are resolved into stress intensities at these 16 points around the
connection. Refer to the WRC 107 discussion for more information on the allowable limits for these stresses and output
processing.
Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations

The Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations are started by selecting the Main Menu option ANALYSIS-FLANGES.
There have been primarily two different ways to calculate stress and one way to estimate leakage for flanges that have
received general application over the past 20 years. The stress calculation methods are from the following sources:
ASME Section VIII
ANSI B16.5 Rating Tables
The leakage calculations were also based on the B16.5 rating table approach. Leakage is a function of the relative
stiffnesses of the flange, gasket and bolting. Using the B16.5 estimated stress calculations to predict leakage does not
consider the gasket type, stiffness of the flange, or the stiffness of the bolting. Using B16.5 to estimate leakage makes the
tendency to leak proportional to the allowable stress in the flange, i.e. a flange with a higher allowable will be able to resist
higher moments without leakage. Leakage is very weakly tied to allowable stress, if at all.
The CAESAR II Flange Leakage Calculation is COADE’s first attempt to improve upon the solution of this difficult
analysis problem. Equations were written to model the flexibility of the annular plate that is the flange, and its ability to
rotate under moment, axial force, and pressure. The results compare favorably with three dimensional finite element
analysis of the flange junction. These correlations assume that the distance between the inside diameter of the flange and the
center of the effective gasket loading diameter is smaller than the distance between the effective gasket loading diameter
and the bolt circle diameter, i.e. that (G-ID) < (BC-G), where, G is the effective gasket loading diameter, ID is the inside
diameter of the flange, and BC is the diameter of the bolt circle.
Several trends have been noticed as flange calculations have been made:
The thinner the flange, the greater the tendency to leak.
Larger diameter flanges have a greater tendency to leak.
Stiffer gaskets have a greater tendency to leak.
Leakage is a function of bolt tightening stress.
Input for the Flange Module is broken into four sections. The first section describes flange geometry.
Flange Analysis
The second section contains data on the bolts and gasket.
Bolts and Gasket

The third section is used to enter material and stress-related data.
Material and Stress Data

The fourth section contains the imposed loads.
Imposed Loads
Note on Bolt Tightening Stress

This is a critical item for leakage determination and for computing stresses in the flange. The ASME Code bases it's stress
calculations on a prespecified, fixed equation for the bolt stress. The resulting value is however often not related to the
actual tightening stress that appears in the flange when the bolts are tightened. For this reason, the initial bolt stress input
field that appears in the first section of data input, Bolt Initial Tightening Stress, is used only for the flexibility/leakage
determination. The value for the bolt tightening stress used in the ASME Flange Stress Calculations is as defined by the
ASME Code:
Bolt Load = Hydrostatic End Force + Force for Leaktight Joint
If the Bolt Initial Tightening Stress field is left blank, CAESAR II uses the value
where 45,000 psi is a constant and d is the nominal diameter of the bolt (correction is made for metric units).
This is a rule of thumb tightening stress that will typically be applied by field personnel tightening the bolts. This computed
value is printed in the output from the flange program. It is interesting to compare this value to the bolt stress printed in the
ASME stress report (also in the output). It is not unusual for the “rule-of-thumb” tightening stress to be larger than the
ASME required stress. When the ASME required stress is entered into the Bolt Initial Tightening Stress data field, a
comparison of the leakage safety factors can be made and the sensitivity of the joint to the tightening torque can be
ascertained. Users are strongly encouraged to “play” with these numbers to get a feel for the relationship between all of the
factors involved.
Using the CAESAR II Flange Modeler

Only the following input parameters are required to get a leakage report. These parameters include
Flange Inside Diameter

Flange Thickness
Bolt Circle Diameter
Number Of Bolts
Bolt Diameter
Effective Gasket Diameter
Uncompressed Gasket Thickness
Effective Gasket Width
Leak Pressure Ratio
Effective Gasket Modulus
Externally Applied Moment
Externally Applied Force
Pressure
The help screens (press [F1] or ? at the data cell) are very useful for all of the input items and should be used liberally here
when there are questions. Unique input cells are discussed as follows:
Leak Pressure Ratio

This value is taken directly from Table 2-5.1 in the ASME Section VIII code. This table is reproduced in the help screens.
This value is more commonly recognized as “m”, and is termed the “Gasket Factor” in the ASME code. This is a very
important number for leakage determination, as it represents the ratio of the pressure required to prevent leakage over the
line pressure.
Effective Gasket Modulus

Typical values are between 300,000 and 400,000 psi for spiral wound gaskets. The higher the modulus the greater the
tendency for the program to predict leakage. Errors on the high side when estimating this value will lead to a more
conservative design.
Flange Rating
This is an optional input, but results in some very interesting output. As mentioned above, it has been a widely used practice
in the industry to use the ANSI B16.5 and API 605 temperature/pressure rating tables as a gauge for leakage. Because these
rating tables are based on allowable stresses, and were not intended for leakage prediction, the leakage predictions that
resulted were a function of the allowable stress for the flange material, and not the flexibility, i.e. modulus of elasticity of
the flange. To give the user a “feel” for this old practice, the minimum and maximum rating table values from ANSI and
API were stored and are used to print minimum and maximum leakage safety factors that would be predicted from this
method. Example output that the user will get upon entering the flange rating is shown as follows:
EQUIVALENT PRESSURE MODEL ————————-

Equivalent Pressure (lb./sq.in.) 1639.85
ANSI/API Min Equivalent Pressure Allowed 1080.00
ANSI/API Max Equivalent Pressure Allowed 1815.00
This output shows that leakage, according to this older method, occurred if a carbon steel flange was used, and leakage did
not occur if an alloy flange was used. (Of course both flanges would have essentially the same “flexibility” tendency to
leak.)
The following input parameters are used only for the ASME Section VIII Division 1 stress calculations:
Flange Type
Flange Outside Diameter
Design Temperature
Small End Hub Thickness
Large End Hub Thickness
Hub Length
Flange Allowables
Bolt Allowables
Gasket Seating Stress
Optional Allowable Multipliers
Flange Face & Gasket Dimensions
The flange type can be selected from the icons on the first spreadsheet.
Material allowables may be acquired from the Section VIII, Division 1 material library that is accessed from the pull-down
list.
An input listing for a typical flange analysis is shown below:
CA E S A R I I MISCELLANEOUS REPORT ECHO
Flange Inside Diameter [B](in.) 30.560
Flange Thickness [t](in.) 4.060
Flange Rating (Optional) 300.000
Bolt Circle Diameter (in.) 38.500
Number of Bolts 32.000
Bolt Diameter (in.) 1.500
Bolt Initial Tightening Stress(lb./sq.in.)
Effective Gasket Diameter [G] (in.) 33.888
Uncompressed Gasket Thickness (in.) 0.063
Basic Gasket Width [b0] (in.) 0.375
Leak Pressure Ratio [m] 2.750
Effective Gasket Modulus(b./sq.in.) 300,000.000
Externally Applied Moment (optional)(in.lb.) 24,000.000
Externally Applied Force (optional)(lb.) 1,000.000
Pressure [P](lb./sq.in.) 400.000
The following inputs are required only if the user wishes to perform stress calcs as per Sect VIII Div. 1
Flange Type (1-8, see ?-Help or Alt-P to plot) 1.000
Flange Outside Diameter [A](in.) 41.500
Design Temperature°F 650.000
Small End Hub Thickness [g0](in.) 1.690
Large End Hub Thickness [g1](in.) 3.440
Hub Length [h](in.) 6.620
Flange Allowable @Design Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 17,500.000
Flange Allowable @Ambient Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 17,500.000
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @Design(lb./sq.in.) 0.279E+08
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @Ambient(lb./sq.in.) 0.279E+08
Bolt Allowable @Design Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 25,000.000
Bolt Allowable @Ambient Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 25,000.000
Gasket Seating Stress [y](lb./sq.in.) 3,700.000
Flange Allowable Stress Multiplier 1.000
Bolt Allowable Stress Multiplier (VIII Div 2 4-1411.000
Disable Leakage Calculations (Y/N) N
Flange Face OD or Lapjt Cnt OD(in.) 34.500
Flange Face ID or Lapjt Cnt ID(in.) 33.000
Gasket Outer Diameter (in.) 36.000
Gasket Inner Diameter (in.) 33.000
Nubbin Width (in.)
Facing Sketch 1.000
Facing Column 2.000 Disable Leakage Calculations (Y/N) N

Remaining Strength of Corroded Pipelines, B31G

The B31G criterion provides a methodology whereby corroded pipelines can be evaluated to determine when specific pipe
segments must be replaced. The original B31G document incorporates a healthy dose of conservatism and as a result,
additional work has been performed to modify the original criteria. This additional work can be found in project report PR-
3805, by Battelle, Inc. The details of the original B31G criteria as well as the modified methods are discussed in detail in
this report.
CAESAR II implements these B31G computations from the Main Menu select Analysis-B31G. The user is then presented
with two spreadsheets on which the problem specific data can be entered.
CAESAR II determines the following values according to the original B31G criteria and four modified methods.
These values are

the hoop stress to cause failure
the maximum allowed operating pressure
the maximum allowed flaw length
The four modified methods vary in the manner in which the corroded area is estimated. These methods are
.85dL—The corroded area is approximated as 0.85 times the maximum pit depth times the flaw length.
Exact—The corroded area is determined numerically using the trapezoid method.
Equivalent—The corroded area is determined by multiplying the average pit depth by the flaw length. Additionally, an
equivalent flaw length (flaw length * average pit depth / maximum pit depth) is used in the computation of the Folias
factor.
Effective—This method also uses a numerical trapezoid summation, however, various sub lengths of the total flaw
length are used to arrive at a worst case condition. Note that if the sub length which produces the worst case coincides
with the total length, the Exact and Effective methods yield the same result.
The input screens from the B31G processor are shown below. All input cells have associated help text for user convenience.
Note that most of the data required by this processor is acquired through actual field measurements.
Data Spreadsheet
A maximum of twenty pit measurements may be entered on the Measurements spreadsheet.
Measurements Spreadsheet
Once the data has been entered, the Analyze menu option initiates the computations. A typical output report is shown as follows.
The data in the input and the resulting output are consistent with the example from the PR-3-805 report on page B-19. For
additional information or backup on these computations, an intermediate computation file is generated.
For additional information on this processor, please refer to either the B31G document or the Battelle project report PR-3-
805.
Expansion Joint Rating

CAESAR II provides a computation module which computes a limit for the total displacement per corrugation of an
expansion joint. According to EJMA (Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association), the maximum permitted amount of axial
movement per corrugation is defined as erated where
ex + ey + eq < erated
The terms in the above equation are defined as:
ex = The axial displacement per corrugation resulting from imposed axial movements.
ey = The axial displacement per corrugation resulting from imposed lateral deflections.
eq = The axial displacement per corrugation resulting from imposed angular rotation, i.e. bending.
erated= The maximum permitted amount of axial movement per corrugation. This value should be obtained from the
Expansion Joint Manufacturer’s catalog.
In addition, EJMA states,
“Also, [as an expansion joint is rotated or deflected laterally] it should be noted that one side of the bellows attains a larger
projected area than the opposite side. Under the action of the applied pressure, unbalanced forces are set up which tend to
distort the expansion joint further. In order to control the effects of these two factors a second limit is established by the
manufacturer upon the amount of angular rotation and/or lateral deflection which may be imposed upon the expansion joint.
This limit may be less than the rated movement. Therefore, in the selection of an expansion joint, care must be exercised to
avoid exceeding either of these manufacturer’s limits.”
This CAESAR II computation module is provided to assist the expansion joint user in satisfying these limitations. This
module computes the terms defined in the above equation and the movement of the joint ends relative to each other. These
relative movements are reported in both the local joint coordinate system and the global coordinate system.
The expansion joint rating module can be entered by selecting MAIN MENU ANALYSIS -EXPANSION JOINT RATING option.
The user is then presented with two input spreadsheets on which the joint geometry and end displacements are specified.
Geometry Spreadsheet
Displacements and Rotation

A report displaying both the input echo and the output calculations are shown as follows. The units used for the coordinate
and displacement values are the length units defined in the active units file. Rotations are in units of degrees.
C A E S A R II MISCELLANEOUS REPORT ECHO
EJMA EXPANSION JOINT RATING
Node Number for “FROM” end 120.000

Node Number for “TO” end 125.000
Number of Convolutions 4.000
Flexible Joint Length (in.)4.447
Effective Diameter(in.)4.996
X Coordinate of “from” end (in.).000

Y Coordinate of “from” end (in.).000
Z Coordinate of “from” end (in.).000
X Coordinate of “to” end (in.)4.447
X Displacement of “from” end (in.).300

Y Displacement of “from” end (in.).250
Z Displacement of “from” end (in.).000
X Rotation of “from” end (deg).000
Y Rotation of “from” end (deg)1.222
Z Rotation of “from” end (deg).030
X Displacement of “to” end (in.)-.100
Y Displacement of “to” end (in.).120
Z Displacement of “to” end (in.).000
X Rotation of “to” end (deg).000
Y Rotation of “to” end (deg)-.020
Z Rotation of “to” end (deg).890
OUTPUT:
AXIAL DISPLACEMENTS PER CONVOLUTION
Axial Displacement.100
Axial Displacement due to Lateral .133
Axial Displacement due to Rotation.016
Axial Displacement TOTAL.250
RELATIVE MOVEMENTS OF END “i” WITH RESPECT TO END “j”

(Local Joint Coordinate System)
Relative Axial Displacement, “x”.401

Relative Lateral Displacement, “y”.158
Relative Bending, “theta” (deg)1.511
Relative Torsion (deg) .019
RELATIVE MOVEMENTS OF END “i” WITH RESPECT TO END “j”

(Global Piping Coordinate System)
Relative X Displacement-.399
Relative Y Displacement-.132
Relative Z Displacement.095
Relative Rotation about X (deg).000
Relative Rotation about Y (deg)-1.242
Relative Rotation about Z (deg).860
In the previous output, the axial displacement total in the report is the total axial displacement per corrugation due to axial,
lateral, and rotational displacement of the expansion joint ends. This is the value that would be compared to the rated axial
displacement per corrugation. If e(total) is greater than the rated axial displacement per corrugation, then there is the possibility
of premature bellows failure. Be sure that the displacement rating from the manufacturer is on a per corrugation basis. If not
then multiply the axial displacement total by the number of corrugations and compare this value to the manufacturer’s
allowable axial displacement. Note that most manufacturers allowed rating is for some set number of cycles (often 10,000).
If the actual number of cycles is less, then the allowed movement can often be greater. Similarly, if the actual number of
cycles is greater than 10,000, then the allowed movement can be smaller. In special situations manufacturers should almost
always be consulted because many factors can affect allowed bellows movement.
The “y” in the report is the total relative lateral displacement of one end of the bellows with respect to the other, and “theta”
is the total relative angular rotation of one end of the bellows with respect to the other. (Note that CAESAR II does not
include “x” into the denominator for the lateral displacement calculations as outlined in EJMA.
Structural Steel Checks - AISC

Code compliance for structural steel shapes is performed according to the AISC (American Institute of Steel Construction)
code. This code check uses the forces and moments at the ends of the structural members, computes stresses, and
allowables, and determines a “unity check” value. If the “unity check” value is less than 1.0, the member is acceptable for
the given loading conditions.
CAESAR II performs the AISC unity check according to either the 1977 or the 1989 edition of the AISC code.
Note Member properties are obtained from the AISC database and used to compute the actual and allowable stress values
for the axial and bending terms comprising the “unity check” equations. The specific database is set using the Configure-
Setup module. The database must be either AISC77.BIN or AISC89.BIN.
To perform “unity check” calculations from the Main Menu click Analyze - AISC.
Global Parameters
After launching this module, the user is presented with the Global Input spreadsheet.
Global Input Spreadsheet

This screen is used to enter data that applies to all members being evaluated. Particular fields are:
Structural Code
The entry in this field should be either AISC 1977 or AISC 1989 respectively. Users should set this entry to match the
database in use.
Allowable Stress Increase Factor

The Allowable Stress Increase Factor is a multiplication factor applied to the computed values of the axial and bending
allowable stresses. Typically this value is 1.0. However, in extreme events the AISC code permits the allowable stresses to
be increased by a factor. Normally a 1/3 increase is applied to the computed allowables, making the Allowable Stress
Increase Factor = 1.33. Examples of extreme events are earthquakes and 100 year storms. For more details see the AISC
code, section 1.5.6.
Stress Reduction Factors Cmy and Cmz

Cmy and Cmz are interaction formula coefficients for the strong and weak axis of the elements (in-plane and out-of-plane).
0.85 for compression members in frames subject to joint translation (sidesway).
For restrained compression members in frames braced against sidesway and not subject to transverse loading between
supports in the plane of bending: 0.6 - 0.4(M1/M2); but not less than 0.4
Where (M1/M2) is the ratio of the smaller to larger moments at the ends, of that portion of the member unbraced in the
plane of bending under consideration.
For compression members in frames braced against joint translation in the plane of loading and subject to transverse
loading between supports, the value of Cmy may be determined by rational analysis. However, in lieu of such analysis,
the following values are suggested per the AISC code:
0.85 for members whose ends are restrained against rotation in the plane of bending
1.0 for members whose ends are unrestrained against rotation in the plane of bending
Young’s Modulus
The slope of the linear portion of the stress-strain diagram. For structural steel this value is usually 29,000,000 psi.
Material Yield Strength

The specified minimum yield stress of the steel being used.
Bending Coefficient
The bending coefficient Cb shall be taken as 1.0 in computing the value of Fby and Fbz for use in Formula 1.6-1a. Cb shall
also be unity when the bending moment at any point in an unbraced length is larger than the moment at either end of the
same length. Otherwise, Cb shall be
Cb = 1.75 + 1.05(M1/M2) + 0.3(M1/M2)2 but not more than 2.3 where (M1/M2) is the ratio of the smaller to larger
moments at the ends.
Form Factor Qa
The form factor is an allowable axial stress reduction factor equal to the effective area divided by the actual area. (Consult
the latest edition of the AISC code for the current computation methods for the effective area.)
Allow Sidesway
The ability of a frame or structure to experience sidesway (joint translation) affects the computation of several of the
coefficients used in the unity check equations. Additionally, for frames braced against sidesway, moments at each end of the
member are required. Normally sidesway is allowed (i.e., the box is checked).
Resize Members Whose Unity Check Value Is . . .

This check box determines whether or not the AISC program attempts to resize specific members as a result of the unity
check computations. Activating this option requires the user to specify a desired minimum unity check and a desired
maximum unity check. If the computed unity check falls outside this range, the program resizes the member appropriately.
The final member size is shown in the output report.
Minimum Desired Unity Check

This is a required entry if the redesign option has been activated. This entry defines the minimum acceptable unity check
allowed. If a unity check falls below this point, the element is resized to a smaller shape.
Maximum Desired Unity Check

This is a required entry if the redesign option has been activated. This entry defines the maximum acceptable unity check
allowed. If a unity check falls above this point, the element is resized to a larger shape.
Local Member Data

Local Member Data must be entered for each member being evaluated.
Local Member Data Spreadsheet

Particular fields are the following:
Member Start Node

The member start node is the “i” end of a structural element. The node number entered should be an integer value between 1
and 32,000. This is a required entry.
Member End Node

The member end node is the “j” end of a structural element. The node number entered should be an integer value between 1
and 32,000. This is a required entry.
Member Type
The member type is the AISC shape label found in the AISC manual. The shape label is used to acquire the member
geometric properties from the database. The label entered in this field must match exactly the label in the database for
properties to be obtained. Use the on line help to list typical member designations.
Since many of the angle labels can be found in the single angles, the double angles (long legs back to back), and the double
angles (short legs back to back), require an “angle type” to tell them apart. This cell should contain a D for double angles
with equal legs, and double angles with long legs back to back. This cell should contain a B for double angles with short
legs back to back.
In- And Out-Of-Plane Fixity Coefficients Ky And Kz

The coefficients used to compute the strong and weak axis slenderness ratios, respectively are
End Conditions Theoretical K Recommended Design K

fixed-fixed 0.5 0.65
fixed-pinned 0.7 0.8
fixed-sliding 1.0 1.2
pinned-pinned 1.0 1.0
fixed-free 2.0 2.1
pinned-sliding 2.0 2.0
Unsupported Axial Length

This length is the length used to determine the buckling strength of the member. Typically, this is the total length of the
member.
Unsupported Length (In-Plane Bending)

This length is the length of the member between braces or supports which prevent bending about the strong axis of the
member.
Unsupported Length (Out-Of-Plane Bending)

This length is the length of the member between braces or supports which prevent bending about the weak axis of the
member.
Double Angle Spacing

Double angles normally have a gap or space separating the adjacent legs. The spacing as defined in the AISC manual must
be 0.0, .375, or .75 inches.
Young’s Modulus
The slope of the linear portion of the stress-strain diagram. For structural steel this value is usually 29,000,000 psi. This
value of Young’s modulus overrides the value specified on the “global” input spreadsheet.
Material Yield Strength

The specified minimum yield stress of the steel being used. This value of the material yield strength overrides the value
specified on the “global” input spreadsheet.
Axial Member Force

This is the force (tension or compression) which acts along the axis of the member. The sign of the number is not
significant, since a worst case load condition will be assumed, i.e. all positive loads.
In-Plane Bending Moment

The maximum bending moment in the member (when sidesway is permitted) which will cause bending about the strong
axis Y-Y of the member. The sign of the number is not significant, since a worst case load condition will be assumed, i.e. all
positive loads.
Out-of-Plane Bending Moment

The maximum bending moment in the member (when sidesway is permitted) which will cause bending about the weak axis
Z-Z of the member. The sign of the number is not significant, since a worst case load condition will be assumed, i.e. all
positive loads.
In-Plane “Small” Bending Moment

For structures braced against sidesway, the end moments must be specified. This value is the smaller of the two in-plane
bending moments which cause bending about the strong axis Y-Y of the member.
In-Plane “Large” Bending Moment

For structures braced against sidesway, the end moments must be specified. This value is the larger of the two in-plane
bending moments which cause bending about the strong axis Y-Y of the member.
Out-of-Plane “Small” Bending Moment

For structures braced against sidesway, the end moments must be specified. This value is the smaller of the two out-of-plane
bending moments which cause bending about the weak axis Z-Z of the member.
Out-of-Plane “Large” Bending Moment

For structures braced against sidesway, the end moments must be specified. This value is the larger of the two out-of-plane
bending moments which cause bending about the weak axis Z-Z of the member.
AISC Output Reports

The output reports can be directed to either the terminal or a printer. The output report begins with a one page summary
describing the current global data and units. This summary is shown on the following page:
AISC Output Summary

The remaining pages in the output report show the data for the individual members. The last column of the report contains
the most important data (namely the unity check value) and the governing AISC equation. Two sample member output
reports are shown in the following figures. The first report is applicable to jobs where sidesway is allowed, the second
report is applicable to jobs where sidesway is prevented.
Member Output Report, Sidesway Permitted
Differences Between the 1977 and 1989 AISC Codes

There are a few differences between the 1977 and 1989 AISC Code Revisions that affect unity check computation. The
most noticeable difference between these two revisions is that the 1989 code provides a method for computing the unity
check on single angles. This procedure (which was not addressed in the 1977 code) can be found in a special code section
following the commentary. The steps necessary to compute the unity check for single angles can be followed by reviewing
the message file (generated upon user request).
The other differences between these two code revisions deal with members in compression. Several constants for Qs have
been altered, and a new factor “kc” has been added. “kc” is a compression element restraint coefficient defined in the 1989
edition of the code.
Because of these code differences, CAESAR II stores the name of the active database in the input file for the AISC Program
when the data file is first created. Attempting to switch databases or compute unity checks on angles using the 1977 code
will generate error messages and the program will abort. Users are urged to consult the applicable AISC Manuals when
using this program.
NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines)

There are two types of force/moment allowables computed during a NEMA run:
• Individual nozzle allowables.

• Cumulative equipment allowables.
Each individual suction, discharge, and extraction nozzle must satisfy the equation:
3F + M < 500De
Where:
F = resultant force on the particular nozzle.

M = resultant moment on the particular nozzle.
De = effective nominal pipe size of the connection.
A typical discharge nozzle calculation is shown as follows:

For cumulative equipment allowables NEMA SM23 states "the combined resultants of the forces and moments of the inlet,
extraction, and exhaust connections resolved at the centerline of the exhaust connection", be within a certain multiple of
Dc; where Dc is the diameter of an opening whose area is equal to the sum of the areas of all of the individual equipment
connections. A typical turbine cumulative (summation) equipment calculation is shown as follows:
SFX, SFY, and SFZ are the respective components of the forces from all connections resolved at the discharge nozzle.
FC(RSLT) is the result of these forces. SMX, SMY and SMZ are the respective components of the moments from all
connections resolved at the discharge nozzle. Dc is the diameter of the equivalent opening as discussed above.
NEMA Turbine Example

Consider a turbine where node 35 represents the inlet nozzle and node 50 represents the outlet nozzle.
The output from a CAESAR II analysis of this piping system includes the forces and moments acting on the pipe elements
that attach to the turbine:
NODE FX FY FZ MX MY MZ
30 -108 -49 -93 73 188 603
35 108 67 93 162 -47 -481
50 -192 7 -11 369 -522 39
55 192 -63 11 78 117 -56
To find the forces acting on the turbine at points 35 and 50 simply reverse the sign of the forces that act on the piping:
LOADS ON TURBINE @ 35 -108 -67 -93 -162 47 481

LOADS ON TURBINE @ 50 192 -7 11 -369 522 -39
Aside from the description, there is only one input spreadsheet for the NEMA turbine. Applied loads should be entered in
global coordinates or extracted directly from the CAESAR II output file (using the on-screen button). This interface enables
iterative addiction of an arbitrary number of nozzles to the model. To add a nozzle, click Add Nozzle.
NEMA Input Inlet

NEMA Input Exhaust

The first page of the output is the input echo, the second and some of the remaining pages display the individual nozzle
calculations while, the last page displays the summation calculations.
Note The actual number of output pages will vary and depends on the number of nozzles defined in the input.
NEMA Input Echo Report

The NEMA output report for the above turbine example shows that the turbine passed. The highest summation load is only
56% of the allowable. If the turbine had failed, the symbol **FAILED** would have displayed, in red, under the
“STATUS” column opposite to the load combination that was excessive.
NEMA Output Nozzle Calculations

NEMA Output Summation Calcs

API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps)

In August of 1995, API released the 8th edition of API 610 for centrifugal pumps for general refinery service.
The API 610 load satisfaction criteria is outlined below:
If clause F.1.1 is satisfied, then the pump is O.K. Clause F.1.1 states that the individual component nozzle loads must fall
below the allowables listed in the Nozzle Loadings table (Table 2) shown below:
If clause F.1.1 is NOT satisfied, but clauses F.1.2.1, F.1.2.2, and F.1.2.3 ARE satisfied then the pump is still O.K.
Clause F.1.2.1 states that the individual component forces and moments acting on each pump nozzle flange shall not exceed
the range specified in Table 2 by a factor of more than 2. Referring to the API 610 report, the user can see if F.1.2.1 is
satisfied by comparing the Force/Moment Ratio to 2. If the ratio exceeds 2, the nozzle status is reported as “FAILING”.
The F.1.2.2 and the F.1.2.3 requirements give equations relating the resultant forces and moments on each nozzle, as well as
on the pump base point respectively. The requirements of these equations, and whether or not they have satisfied API 610,
are shown on the bottom of the report.
The following example is taken from the API 610 code and shows the review of an overhung end-suction process pump in
English units. The three CAESAR II input screens are shown, followed by the program output.
API 610 Input Data

API 610 Suction Nozzle

API 610 Discharge Nozzle

Vertical In-Line Pumps

Note that on the first screen there is a check box for a vertical in-line pump. This is to be used when the pump is the vertical
in-line type supported only by the attached piping. API states that if this is the case then 2.0 times the loads from Table 2
can be used. However, even if the pump fails the 2.0 Table 2 criteria, it may still pass. If the principal stress on the nozzle is
less than 6,000 psi, then that nozzle passes. If the principal stress on either nozzle is greater than 6,000 psi, the overall status
will be reported as “Failed.”
In API 610 there is an example problem which illustrates the way that the stresses are computed on these in-line pump
nozzles. The two basic equations for determining stress are
stresses (s) = Force / Area + Moment / Section Modulus

Shear Stresses (t) = Force / Area + Torque * distance / J
Where J is the polar moment of inertia.
In equation number 2, both terms of the equation will always add together. On the other hand, the Force/Area term in
equation 1 will depend on the sign of the force (tension or compression) that the user enters in the force and moment
spreadsheet. The sign of the force is determined from the user-entered Centerline Direction Cosine, which for vertical in-
line pumps should be entered in the direction extending from the discharge to the suction nozzle. The distances that are
usually entered for pedestal mounted pumps can be left blank since they are not used.
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors)

The requirements of this standard are identical to those of NEMA SM-23 (1991), except that all of the NEMA allowables
are increased by 85%.
API 617 Allowables = 1.85 * NEMA SM-23 Allowables
The input screens for this evaluation display below:
API 617 Input

API 617 Suction/Discharge Input

API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers)

This calculation covers the allowed loads on the vertical, co-linear nozzles (item 9 in the figure) found on most single, or
multi-bundled air cooled heat exchangers.
The several figures from API 661 illustrate the type of open exchanger body analyzed by this standard.
API 661 Heat Exchangers

The input for API 661 is self-explanatory.
The “Heat Exchangers” figure and the Resultant Force/Multiplier inputs for Spreadsheet #1 are optional (default equals 1).
The two requirements for API 661 to be satisfied are as follows:
5.1.11.1 - “Each nozzle in the corroded condition shall be capable of withstanding the moments and forces defined in Heat
Exchangers figure.”
5.1.11.2 - The sum of the forces and moments on each fixed header (i.e. each individual bundle) will be less than 1,500 lb.
transverse to the bundle, 2,500 lb. axial to the bundle, and 3,000 pound axial on the nozzle centerline. The allowed moments
are 3,000, 2,000, and 4,000 ft.lb. respectively. “This recognizes that the application of these moments and forces will cause
movement and that this movement will tend to reduce the actual loads.”
API 661 Input Data

API 661 Inlet Nozzle Data

API 661 Outlet Nozzle Data

A typical API 661 report is shown as follows:

Heat Exchange Institute Standard For Closed Feedwater Heaters

This module of the CAESAR II Rotating Equipment program provides a method for evaluating the allowable loads on
shell type heat exchanger nozzles. Section 3.14 of the HEI bulletin discusses the computational methods utilized to compute
these allowable loads.
The method employed by HEI is a simplification of the WRC 107 method, in which the allowable loads have been
linearized to show the relationship between the maximum permitted radial force and the maximum permitted moment
vector. If this relationship is plotted (using the moments as the abscissa and the forces as the ordinate), a straight line can be
drawn between the maximum permitted force and the maximum permitted moment vector, forming a triangle with the axes.
Then for any set of applied forces and moments, the nozzle passes if the location of these loads falls inside the triangle.
Conversely, the nozzle fails if the location of the loads falls outside the triangle.
The CAESAR II HEI output has been modified to include both the plot of the allowables and the location of the current
load set on this plot.
The HEI bulletin states that the effect of internal pressure has been included in the combined stresses; however, the effect of
the pressure on the nozzle thrust has not. This requires combination with the other radial loads. CAESAR II automatically
computes the pressure thrust and adds it to the radial force if the Add Pressure Thrust check box is enabled.
A sample input for the HEI module is shown below. Note that since the pressure is greater than zero, a pressure thrust force
will be computed and combined with the radial force.
HEI Nozzle/Vessel Input

API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services)

This module of the CAESAR II Rotating Equipment Program provides a method for evaluating the allowable loads on
Fired Heaters.
Input consists of the tube nominal diameter and the forces and moments acting on the tube, as shown in the figure below:
API 560 Input Data

Upon execution of the analysis, CAESAR II compares the input forces and moments to the allowables as published in API
560 Example output is shown below.
API 560 Equipment Report

Allow sidesway • 12-39
Index Allowable stress increase factor • 12-39

Bending coefficient • 12-39
Double angle spacing • 12-42
Fixity coefficients • 12-42
Form factor qa • 12-39
3 Member type • 12-42
3D Graphic Highlights • 5-50 Stress reduction factors • 12-39
3D Graphic Highlights - Materials, Diameters, Structural code • 12-39
Wall Thickness, Insulation • 5-50 Algebraic • 6-21
3D Graphics Configuration • 5-43 Allowable stress increase factor • 12-39
3D Graphics Highlights Allowable stresses • 5-18
Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, Allowable Stresses • 5-18
Wind/Wave Loads • 5-52 Alpha tolerance • 5-6
Temp.and Press. • 5-51 Ambient temperature • 5-6
Temperature and Pressure • 5-51 Analysis menu • 4-6
3D Graphics Interactive Feature Analysis Menu • 4-6
Walk Through • 5-56 Analyzing the dynamics job
3D HOOPs Graphics • 10-8 Eigensolver • 8-37
3-D Modeler • 5-39 Mode shapes • 8-37
3D/HOOPS Graphics • 10-8 Performing a harmonic analysis
3D/HOOPs Graphics in the Animation Processor •
For • 8-37
9-18
3D/HOOPS Graphics in the Animation Processor Pha • 8-37
• 9-18 Performing a modal analysis
3D/HOOPS Graphics in the Output Processor • 7- Eigens • 8-37
23
3D/HOOPS Graphics in the Static Output Freque • 8-37
Processor • 7-23 Modes • 8-37
3D/HOOPS in the Animation Processor • 9-18 Natura • 8-37
A Sturm • 8-37
About the CAESAR II documentation • 1-5 Performing a spectral analysis
About the CAESAR II Documentation • 1-5 Mas • 8-38
ABS • 6-21 Selection of phase angles
ABS Method • 8-15
Harmonic • 8-38
ACCEPTANCE OF TERMS OF AGREEMENT
BY THE USER • 2 Angle spacing, double • 12-42
Actual cold loads • 6-23 Animation
Adjust Deflection Scale • 7-23 Motion • 7-26
Advanced • 8-31, 8-35 Animation of Dynamic Results odal/Spectrum • 9-
Advanced parameters • 8-16 19
Advanced Parameters • 8-16 Animation of Dynamic Results-Harmonic • 9-19
Advanced parameters show screen • 8-8 Animation of Dynamic Resultsime History • 9-19
Advanced Parameters Show Screen • 8-8 Animation of Dynamic Results-Modal/Spectrum •
AISC code comparisons • 12-46 9-19
AISC database • 10-2 Animation of Dynamic Results-Time History • 9-
AISC output reports • 12-45 19
AISC Output Reports • 12-45 Animation of static results • 7-26
AISC unity checks Animation of Static Results - Displacements • 9-
19
Animation of Static Results Notes • 7-26
Announcing Builds • 1-7
2 Index
ANSI B16.5 • 12-25 Bends with trunnions • 12-8

API 560 (fired heaters for general refinery Bends with Trunnions • 12-8
services) • 12-68 Bilinear springs • 11-9
API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Bilinear supports • 11-9
Services) • 12-68 Bolt tightening stress • 12-24
API 605 rating tables • 12-25 Bolts and gasket • 12-20
API 610 Boundary conditions • 5-7, 9-5
Centrifugal pumps Boundary Conditions • 5-7
Load Satisfaction Criteria, API 610 • 12-54 BS-806 • 12-8
API 610 (centrifugal pumps) • 12-54 Building static load cases • 6-5
API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) • 12-54 Building Static Load Cases • 6-8
API 617 (centrifugal compressors) • 12-60 Building the load cases • 3-11
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors) • 12-60 Building the Load Cases • 3-11
API 661 (air cooled heat exchangers) • 12-62 Builds, Version • 1-7
API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) • 12-62 Buried pipe displacements • 11-3
Application guide • 1-5 Buried pipe example • 11-12
Applications of CAESAR II • 1-3 Buried Pipe Modeling • 11-1
Archive • 6-12 Buried pipe restraints • 11-3
Archiving and reinstalling • 1-8 C
Archiving and Reinstalling an Old, Patched
Version • 1-8 CADWorx/PIPE • 1-4
ASCE #7 wind loads • 6-9 CAESAR II Installation • 2-5
ASCE7 • 8-21 CAESAR II LICENSE AGREEMENT • 2
Auxiliary data area • 5-9 CAESAR II Quick Start • 3-2
Auxiliary Data Area • 5-9 CAESAR II Technical Changes • 1-12
Auxiliary data fields CAESAR II Underground Pipe Modeler • 11-2
Auxiliary screens • 5-9 CAESAR II, About • 1-2
Expansion joint Can Builds Be Applied To Any Version? • 1-7
Center of gravity report • 3-9
Effective diameter of b • 5-13
Tutorial • 3-9
Pressure thrust in expa • 5-13 Checking the installation • 2-5
Axial length, Unsupported • 12-42 Code compliance • 8-3
Axial member force • 12-42 Code Compliance Report • 7-15
Code Stress Colors by Percent • 7-23
B Code Stress Colors by Value • 7-23
B31.1 Appendix II (Safety Valve) Force Response Code stresses for dynamics • 9-5
Spectrum • 8-25 Cold loads • 6-23
Backfill • 11-9 Column reports • 7-2
Backfill efficiency • 11-9 Combination load cases • 6-15
Bandwidth • 6-12 Combination Method • 8-15
Basic load cases • 6-15 Combination Methods • 6-21
Basic operation • 3-5 Concentrated forces • 8-2
Basic Operation • 3-5 Configuration • 2-5
Batch run • 6-2 Connecting nodes • 10-18
Bend data • 5-10 Construction element • 5-6
Bend Data • 5-10 Control parameters • 8-3, 8-8, 8-11, 8-16, 8-31, 8-
Bend stress intensification factors • 12-6 35
Bend Stress Intensification Factors • 12-6 Control Parameters • 8-8, 8-11, 8-16, 8-31, 8-35
Bending coefficient • 12-39 Corroded pipelines, B31G
Bending moment, In-plane • 12-42 Calculating corroded area • 12-28
Bending moment, Out-of-plane • 12-42 Flaw Lengt • 12-28
Bending stress • 12-15 Cumulative usage • 9-5
Index 3
Cumulative Usage Report • 7-16 Harmonic analysis • 8-2

Custom Reports • 7-7 Concentrated forces • 8-2
Custom Reports Toolbar • 7-6, 7-10
Cyclic stress range • 8-2
Customizable Toolbar • 5-3, 5-4
Customize Toolbar • 5-3 Dynamic amplitude • 8-2
Cutoff frequency • 8-8 Equipment start-up • 8-2
Cyclic stress range • 8-2
Fluid pulsation • 8-2
D
Forcing frequencies • 8-2
Damping • 8-11 Phase angle • 8-2
Data fields • 5-4
Data Fields • 5-4 Rotating equipment • 8-2
Definition of a load case • 6-15 Vibration • 8-2
Definition of a Load Case • 6-15 Modal analysis • 8-2
Deflected Shape • 7-23
Mode shapes • 8-2
Densities • 5-8
Design Natural frequency • 8-2
CADWorx/PIPE • 1-4 Spectrum analysis • 8-2
Detecting/Checking Builds • 1-8 Impulse analysis • 8-2
Diagnostics menu • 4-9
Diagnostics Menu • 4-9 Relief valve • 8-2
Differences Between the 1977 and 1989 AISC Response spectrum meth • 8-2
Codes • 12-46
Response vs. frequency • 8-2
DISCLAIMER - CAESAR II • 4
Disp • 6-20 Sustained stresses in • 8-2
Disp/Force • 6-20 Time history analysis • 8-2
Disp/Force/Stress • 6-20 Dynamic capabilities in CAESAR II • 8-2
Disp/Stress • 6-20 Dynamic Capabilities in CAESAR II • 8-2
Displacement load case • 6-22 Dynamic imbalance • 8-9
Displacements • 5-14, 7-10, 9-5 Dynamic Input and Analysis • 8-1
DLF spectrum generator • 8-28 Dynamic load case number • 8-15
DLF/Spectrum Generator • 8-18 Dynamic load factor • 8-17
DLF/Spectrum Generator - The Spectrum Wizard Dynamic load specification • 8-3
• 8-18 Dynamic Output Processing • 9-1
Double angle spacing • 12-42 Dynamic output processor • 9-2
Driving frequencies • 8-3
Dynamic amplitude • 8-2
Dynamic analysis input processor • 8-5
Dynamic analysis types • 8-5
Dynamic input commands • 8-5
Initiating dynamic input • 8-5
Prerequisites for dynamic inp • 8-5
Dynamic Analysis Input Processor Overview • 8-5
Dynamic capabilities
4 Index
Boundary conditions • 9-5 Spectrum definitions • 8-12

Friction resista • 9-5 Response spect • 8-12
Nonlinear restra • 9-5 Shock definiti • 8-12
Forces/stresses, dynamics • 9-5 Spectrum data • 8-12
Global forces, dynamics • 9-5
Spectrum name • 8-12
Harmonic results • 9-2
General results • 9-2 Spectrum load cases
Earthquake • 8-14
Included mass data • 9-5
% Force active • 9-5 El Centro earth • 8-14
% Force added • 9-5 Independent sup • 8-14
% Mass included • 9-5 Spectrum load cases example • 8-14

Static/dynamic combinations
Extracted modes • 9-5 ABS • 8-15
Missing mass corr • 9-5 Combina • 8-15
System response • 9-5 Hanger • 8-15
Local forces, dynamics • 9-5
Occasio • 8-15
Mass model • 9-5
Lumped masses • 9-5 Piping • 8-15
Mass participation factors • 9-5 SRSS • 8-15
Modes mass normalized • 9-5 Sustain • 8-15
Modes unity normalized • 9-5
Earthquakes • 8-29
Natural frequencies • 9-5
Edit Dynamic Load Case • 5-26
Report types, dynamics
Edit menu • 5-26
Displacements • 9-5 Edit Menu • 5-26
Report option • 9-5 Edit Static Load Case • 5-26
Restraints, dynamics • 9-5 Effective diameter • 5-13
Maximum load on • 9-5 Effective gasket modulus • 12-25
Eigensolution • 8-3
Maximum modal c • 9-5 Eigensolver • 8-37
Mode identifica • 9-5 EJMA (expansion joint manufacturers association)
Spectrum results • 9-2 • 12-32
El centro • 8-12
Static/dynamic comb • 9-2
Element Direction Cosines • 5-5
Stresses, dynamics • 9-5 Element length • 11-3
Code stresses for • 9-5 Element lengths • 5-4
Stress intensific • 9-5 Element Lengths • 5-4
End connections • 10-2
Stress report • 9-5 Entering the dynamic analysis input menu • 8-5
Time history results • 9-2 Entering the Dynamic Analysis Input Menu • 8-5
Entering the static output processor • 7-2
E
Entering the Static Output Processor • 7-2
Earthquake (spectrum) • 8-12 ENTIRE AGREEMENT • 3
Earthquake (Spectrum) • 8-12 Entry into the processor • 9-2
Earthquake input spectrum Entry into the Processor • 9-2
Environment menu • 5-36
Environment Menu • 5-36
Equipment and component evaluation • 12-1
Index 5
Bend SIFs
F
Trunnion • 12-6
Bends with trunnions Fatal error dialog • 6-3
Fatal Error Message • 6-3
Trunn • 12-8
Fatigue (FAT) • 6-5, 6-15
Equipment checks • 12-1 Fatigue curve • 5-18
Flanges attached to bend en • 12-8 Fatigue curve data • 5-18
Intersection SIFs • 12-3 Fatigue curve dialog • 5-18
Pressure stiffening Fatigue failure • 9-5
Flexib • 12-8 Fatigue load cases • 9-5
Stress • 12-8 Fatigue loadings • 7-16
Fatigue stress types • 6-5, 8-9, 8-14, 9-5
Stress concentrations and i • 12-9
Fatigue-type load cases • 7-16
Equipment Component and Compliance • 12-1
File menu • 4-3, 5-24
Equipment start-up • 8-2
File Menu • 4-3, 5-24
Error Check • 6-2
Limiting the Amount of Displayed Info • 5-53
Error checking • 6-2
Fixity coefficients ky and kz • 12-42
Errors, warnings, and notes • 6-2
Fixity coefficients, AISC • 12-42
Error Checking • 6-2
Flange leakage/stress calculations • 12-20
Error Checking Static Load Cases • 6-1
Flange leakage • 12-20
Error checking the model • 3-9
Error Checking the Model • 3-9 Methodology • 12-20
Error handling and analyzing the job • 8-36 Flange rating
Error Handling and Analyzing the Job • 8-36 ANSI B16.5 • 12-25
Errors
API 605 • 12-25
Errors and warnings • 3-9
ESL • 8-36 Rating Table • 12-25
ESL installation on a network • 2-15 Leak pressure ratio
ESL Installation on a Network • 2-15 Gasket • 12-25
ESL menu • 4-10 Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations • 12-20
ESL Menu • 4-10 Flange modeler • 12-25
Excitation frequency • 8-9 Flange rating • 12-25
Executing static analysis • 3-12 Flanges • 5-9
Executing Static Analysis • 3-12 Flanges attached to bend ends • 12-8
Execution of static analysis • 6-12 Flanges Attached to Bend Ends • 12-8
Execution of Static Analysis • 6-12 Flaw length • 12-28
Expansion joint • 5-6, 5-13, 5-31 Flexible nozzles • 5-20
Expansion Joint • 5-13 Flexible Nozzles • 5-20
Expansion joint rating • 12-32 Fluid pulsation • 8-2
Ejma • 12-32 Force • 6-20
Maximum axial movement • 12-32 Force sets • 8-3, 8-29, 8-32, 8-34
Maximum lateral deflection • 12-32 Force Sets • 8-29, 8-32, 8-34
Maximum rotation • 12-32 Force spectrum methodology • 8-17
Output • 12-32 Force Stress • 6-20
Expansion Joint Rating • 12-32 Forces • 5-15
Expansion load cases • 3-11, 6-22 Forces/stresses • 9-5
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS • 4 Force-time profiles • 8-32, 8-33
External software lock Forcing frequency • 8-2, 8-37
ESL updating • 4-10 Form factor QA • 12-39
Local ESL • 2-15 Frequency • 8-9
Network ESL • 2-15 Frequency cutoff • 8-37
Extracted modes • 9-5
6 Index
Friction Multiplier • 6-20 Harmonic displacements • 8-9

Friction resistance • 9-5 Harmonic forces • 8-9
Full run • 1-9 Harmonic load definition • 8-9
Full Run • 1-9 Excitation f • 8-9
G Phasing of harmonic loads
Damping • 8-11
Gasket factor • 12-25
GENERAL • 3 Frequency • 8-9
General Computed Results • 7-17 Harmonic co • 8-11
Global element forces • 7-12
Global Element Forces • 7-12 Harmonic fo • 8-9
Global forces • 9-5 Pressure wa • 8-9
Global parameters • 12-39 Reciprocati • 8-9
Global Parameters • 12-39
Rotating eq • 8-9
H Harmonic control parameters • 8-11
Hanger • 5-21, 6-23 Harmonic displacements • 8-9
Hanger Design • 6-20 Harmonic force • 8-9
Hanger design control data • 5-31 Harmonic loads • 8-9
Hanger selection Harmonic results • 8-38, 9-2
Actual cold loads • 6-23 Harmonic stress • 8-38
Additional hanger • 6-23 Heat Exchange Institute Standard For Closed
Design load cases • 6-23 Feedwater Heaters • 12-67
Hanger sizing load cases • 6-23 Heat exchangers • 12-62
Hot load • 6-23 HEI standard for closed feedwater heaters • 12-67
Operating load cases • 6-23 Help menu • 4-12
Recommended load cases • 6-23 Help Menu • 4-12
Restrained weight • 6-23 HOOPS Toolbar Manipulations • 5-49
Spring hanger design • 6-23 HOOPS‘ License Grant • 4
Hanger sizing • 6-23, 8-15 Hot load • 6-23
Hanger Stiffness • 6-20
Hanger Table with Text • 7-18
I
Hangers • 5-21 IBC • 8-23
Hardware requirements • 2-3 Identifying Builds • 1-7
Harmonic • 8-9, 8-37 IGE/TD/12 • 5-5
Harmonic analysis • 8-2, 8-3 Impulse • 8-30
Harmonic analysis input Impulse analysis • 8-2
Included mass data • 9-5
Incore solution • 6-12
Independent support motion • 8-14
Index numbers, structural steel input • 10-2
In-plane bending moment • 12-42
In-plane large bending moment • 12-42
In-plane small bending moment • 12-42
Input Echo • 7-18
Input listing • 9-5
Input menu • 4-5
Input Menu • 4-5
Input overview based on analysis category • 8-7
Input Overview Based on Analysis Category • 8-7
Installation • 2-1, 2-5
Installation menu options • 2-5
Index 7
Installing Builds • 1-7 Basic load cases • 3-11

Installing CAESAR II • 2-4 Combination load cases • 3-11, 6-15
Installing CAESAR II in Silent Mode • 2-13 Example of load cases • 6-15
Installing CAESAR II Overview • 2-4 Expansion load case • 6-22
Insulation density • 5-8 Occasional load cases • 6-22
Intersection stress intensification factors • 12-3 Operating load cases • 6-22
Intersection Stress Intensification Factors • 12-3 Recommended load cases • 3-11
Introduction • 1-1 Stress category • 6-15
Stress types • 6-15
K Sustained load case • 6-22
Kaux menu items Types of load cases • 3-11
Include Piping Input Files • 5-36 Types of loads • 6-15
Include structural input files • 5-36 Load cycles • 6-15
Review sifs • 5-36 Load, Ultimate • 11-9
Review SIFs at Bend Node • 5-36 Loading conditions • 5-7
Special execution parameters • 5-36 Loading Conditions • 5-7
Kaux-include structural files • 10-2 Local element forces • 7-12
Local Element Forces • 7-12
L Local forces • 9-5
Lateral bearing length • 11-3 Local member data • 12-42
Leak pressure ratio • 12-25 Local Member Data • 12-42
Lease • 1-9 Lumped masses • 8-7
LICENSE GRANT • 2
M
License types
Full run • 1-9 Main menu • 4-2
Lease • 1-9 Analysis
Limited run • 1-9 Menu items • 4-6
LIMITATIONS OF REMEDIES • 3 File • 3-2
Limited run • 1-9
Default data directory • 4-3
Limited Run • 1-9
LIMITED WARRANTY • 2 Input file types • 4-3
Limiting the Amount of Displayed Info. Find New command • 4-3
Node, Range, Cuttin • 5-53
Load case list • 6-5 Open command • 4-3
Load Case Options Tab • 6-19 Select an existing job file • 4-3
Load Case Report • 7-17 Input
Load cases • 3-2, 3-13, 5-6, 5-7, 5-21, 5-24, 6-5, Data entry • 3-5
6-12, 6-15, 6-23, 7-2, 7-16, 7-21, 7-26, 8-
9, 8-12, 8-30, 8-38, 9-2, 9-5, 10-2, 10-31, Input menu items • 4-5
12-10 Main Menu • 4-1
Major Steps in Dynamic Input • 8-4
Mass and stiffness model • 8-3
Mass and stiffness model, Modifying • 8-10, 8-16,
8-30, 8-32, 8-34
Mass correction, Missing • 9-5
Mass model • 8-7, 9-5
Mass participation factors • 8-38, 9-5
Material elastic properties • 5-8
Material Elastic Properties • 5-8
Material fatigue curve • 5-18
Material name • 5-8
8 Index
Material number • 5-8 Control parameter • 8-3

Material yield strength • 12-39, 12-42 Dynamics • 8-3
Max • 6-21 Conversion • 8-3
Maximum Code Stress • 7-23
Mass and st • 8-3
Maximum desired unity check • 12-39
Maximum Displacements • 7-23 Specifying loads • 8-3
Maximum Restraints Loads • 7-23 Cod • 8-3
Member data, Local • 12-42 Dri • 8-3
Member end node • 12-42
Member start node • 12-42 Dyn • 8-3
Member type • 12-42 For • 8-3
Membrane stress • 12-15
Har • 8-3
Menu commands • 5-24
Menu Commands • 5-24 Loa • 8-3
Min • 6-21 Nat • 8-3
Minimum desired unity check • 12-39
Miscellaneous Data • 7-19 Occ • 8-3
Missing mass correction • 9-5 Poi • 8-3
Modal • 8-7 Sho • 8-3
Modal analysis • 8-2
Modal analysis input Sta • 8-3
Control parameters Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis • 8-3
Cutoff frequency • 8-8 Modes • 8-37
Modes mass normalized • 9-5
Modes of vibration • 8-8
Modes of vibration • 8-7, 8-8, 8-37
Lumped masses • 8-7 Modes unity normalized • 9-5
Modes of vibration • 8-7 Modifying mass and stiffness model • 8-10, 8-16,
Natural frequencies • 8-7 8-30, 8-32, 8-34
Modifying Mass and Stiffness Model • 8-10, 8-16,
System response • 8-7 8-30, 8-32
Mass model • 8-7 Modifying Mass and Stiffness Models • 8-34
Modes of vibration • 8-7 More • 7-2
Motion • 7-26
Natural frequencies • 8-7
System response • 8-7 N
Mode identification line • 9-5 Natural frequencies • 8-3, 8-7, 8-37, 9-5
Mode shapes • 8-2, 8-37 NEMA SM23
Model menu • 5-31 Steam turbines
Model Menu • 5-31 Cumulative equipment calculations, N • 12-47
Model menu items NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) • 12-47
Expansion joints • 5-31 NEMA turbine example • 12-48
Hanger design control data • 5-31 NEMA Turbine Example • 12-48
Title • 5-31 Network ESLs • 2-16
Valve • 5-31 Node Names • 5-22
Model modifications for dynamic analysis Node numbers • 5-4
Node Numbers • 5-4
Nominal pipe size • 5-5
Nonlinear restraints • 6-12, 9-5
Note dialog • 6-8
Note Message • 6-5, 6-8
Note on Bolt Tightening Stress • 12-24
Notes on CAESAR II Load Cases • 6-15
Index 9
Notes on Network ESLs • 2-16 Alpha tolerance • 5-6

Notes on Printing or Saving Reports to a File • 7- Ambient temperature • 5-6
21, 9-17 Construction element • 5-6
Notes on the Soil Model • 11-9 Densities • 5-8
Novell file server ESL installation • 2-15 Expansion joints • 5-6
Novell File Server ESL Installation • 2-15 Input spreadsheet • 5-2
Novell workstation ESL installation • 2-15 Insulation density • 5-8
Novell Workstation ESL Installation • 2-15 Material name • 5-8
Nozzle data • 12-10 Material number • 5-8
Nozzle flexibility • 12-17 Nominal pipe size • 5-5
Nozzle loads • 12-10 Rigid elements • 5-6
Nozzle screen • 12-17 Sif & tees • 5-6
Specific gravity • 5-8
O Stress intensification factors • 5-6
Obtaining Builds • 1-7 Thermal strains • 5-6
Occasional dynamic stresses • 8-15 Piping Input • 5-1
Occasional load cases • 6-22 Piping input generation • 3-5
Occasional stress • 8-2, 8-3, 8-15 Piping Input Generation • 3-5
Offsets • 5-23 Piping job • 10-2
Operating conditions Piping material • 5-8
Temperatures and pressures • 5-6 Piping Material • 5-8
Operating Conditions Plot • 5-39
Temperatures and Pressures • 5-6 Plotting
Operating load cases • 6-22 Static output review • 3-13
Original Unburied Model • 11-12 Tutorial • 3-5
Out-of-plane bending moment • 12-42 Point loads • 8-3
Out-of-plane large bending moment • 12-42 Preface • 2
Out-of-plane small bending moment • 12-42 Pressure stiffening • 12-8
Output menu • 4-7 Pressure Stiffening • 12-8
Output Menu • 4-7 Pressure thrust • 5-13
Output Type • 6-20 Pressure vs. elevation table • 6-9
Output Viewer Wizard • 7-20 Pressure wave • 8-9
Ovalization, bends • 12-8 Printing or saving reports to a file • 9-17
Overstress • 7-23 Printing or Saving Reports to a File Notes • 7-21
Overview • 2-2 Proctor number • 11-9
Overview of Structural Capability in CAESAR II • Produced Results Data • 6-20
10-2 Program Changes • 1-10
Program support • 1-6
P Technical support phone numbers • 1-6
Peak stress index • 12-9 Training • 1-6
Performing the analysis • 8-36 Program support/user assistance • 1-6
Performing the Analysis • 8-36 Program Support/User Assistance • 1-6
Phase angle • 8-2, 8-9, 8-37 Providing wind data • 6-9
Phasing • 8-9 Providing Wind Data • 6-9
Pipe modeler • 11-3 Pulse table/DLF spectrum generation • 8-18, 8-32
Pipe section properties • 5-5 Pulse Table/DLF Spectrum Generation • 8-32
Pipe Section Properties • 5-5
Q
Piping codes for earthquakes • 8-15
Piping dimensions • 10-18 Quick start • 3-2
Piping input • 3-5 Quick Start and Basic Operation • 3-1
10 Index
Restraint auxiliary data • 10-18

R Restraint summary • 7-11
Reciprocating pumps • 8-9 Restraint Summary • 7-11
Recommended load cases • 6-22 Restraints • 5-12, 7-11, 9-5
Recommended Load Cases • 6-22 Review Current Units • 5-26
Recommended load cases for hanger selection • 6- Review Units • 5-26
23 Rigid elements • 5-6
Recommended Load Cases for Hanger Selection • Rigid weight • 5-11
6-23 Rigid Weight • 5-11
Recommended procedures • 11-11 Rotating equipment • 8-2, 8-9
Recommended Procedures • 11-11
S
Relief load synthesis • 8-17
Relief Load Synthesis • 8-17 Sample input • 10-10
Relief load synthesizer • 8-32 Sample Input • 10-10
Relief loads (spectrum) • 8-17 Save Animation to File • 9-19
Relief Loads (Spectrum) • 8-17 Save As Graphics Image • 5-53
Relief loads spectrum Scalar • 6-21
Force sets for relief loads Screens • 5-9
Earthquakes • 8-29 Seismic analysis • 8-2
Select by Single Click • 7-23
Relief valv • 8-29
Select Case Names • 7-2
Skewed load • 8-29 Selection of phase angles • 8-38
Water hamme • 8-29 Selection of Phase Angles • 8-38
Shape factor, wind • 6-9
Relief load synthesis
Shock definition • 8-12
Dynamic load fact • 8-17 Shock results • 8-3
Force spectrum me • 8-17 Shock spectra • 8-2
Show Event Viewer Gr • 7-23
Relief valve • 8-17
Sidesway • 12-39
Thrust loads • 8-17 Sidesway, AISC • 12-39
Spectrum definitions SIFs & tees • 5-6
DLF spectrum gener • 8-28 SignMax • 6-21
SignMin • 6-21
Spectrum data • 8-28 Skewed load • 8-29
Spectrum load cases Slug flow
Impulse • 8-30 Specifying the load
Time history • 8-30 Force sets, slug flow • 8-32
Relief valve • 8-2, 8-17, 8-29, 8-32 Force-time profile • 8-32
Remaining Strength of Corroded Pipelines, B31G Load cases, slug flow • 8-32
• 12-28
Remaining strength of corroded pipelines,B31g • Relief load synthesizer • 8-32
12-28 Relief valve • 8-32
Report options • 7-10
Water hammer • 8-32
Report Options • 7-10
Report Template Editor • 7-7 Slug flow analysis • 8-2
Report types • 9-5 Snubbers • 8-7
Report Types • 9-5 Snubbers Active • 6-20
Resize members • 12-39 Software revision procedures • 1-7
Response spectrum method • 8-2 Software Revision Procedures • 1-7
Response spectrum table • 8-12 Soil model • 11-9
Response vs. frequency spectra • 8-2 Soil model numbers • 11-9
Restrained weight • 6-23 Soil Models • 11-3
Index 11
Soil properties • 11-2 Static solution methodology • 6-12

Soil stiffnesses • 11-2 Archive • 6-12
Soil supports • 11-9 Incore solution
Special element information • 5-6 Bandwidth • 6-12
Special Element Information • 5-6
Nonlinear restrai • 6-12
Special execution parameters • 5-36
Specific gravity • 5-8 Static analysis
Specifying hydrodynamic parameters • 6-11 Stiffness matrix • 6-12
Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters • 6-11 Static/dynamic combinations • 8-15, 8-30, 8-32, 8-
Specifying loads, dynamics • 8-3 34, 9-2
Specifying the Load • 8-32 Static/Dynamic Combinations • 8-15, 8-30, 8-32,
Specifying The Load • 8-33 8-34
Specifying the loads • 8-7, 8-9, 8-12, 8-17, 8-32, Stiffness matrix • 6-12
8-33 Stiffness model, Modifying • 8-10, 8-16, 8-30, 8-
Specifying the Loads • 8-9, 8-12, 8-17 32, 8-34
Spectrum • 8-38 Stress • 6-20
Spectrum analysis • 8-2 Stress category • 6-15
Spectrum data • 8-12, 8-28 Stress concentration factor • 12-9
Spectrum definitions • 8-28, 8-32 Stress Concentrations and Intensification • 12-9
Spectrum Definitions • 8-28, 8-32 Stress concentrations and intensifications • 12-9
Spectrum load cases • 8-14, 8-30, 8-32, 9-2 Stress increase factor
Spectrum Load Cases • 8-14, 8-32 AISC • 12-39
Spectrum name • 8-12 Stress increase factor, Allowable • 12-39
Spectrum results • 9-2 Stress intensification factors • 5-6, 9-5
Spectrum/Load Cases • 8-30 Stress intensification factors/tees • 5-19
Spreadsheet overview • 5-2 Stress Intensification Factors/Tees • 5-19
Spreadsheet Overview • 5-2 Stress reduction factors cmy and cmz • 12-39
Spring hanger design • 6-23 Stress reduction factors, aisc • 12-39
SRSS • 6-21, 8-15 Stress report • 9-5
Start, CAESAR II • 3-2 Stress Summary • 7-14
Starting CAESAR II • 3-2 Stress types • 3-11, 6-5, 6-15, 8-14
Static load case number • 8-15 Stresses • 7-13, 9-5
Static load cases Stresses, Allowable • 5-18
Building static load cases • 6-5 Structural capability in CAESAR II • 10-2
Limitations of the load case editor • 6-5 Structural code • 12-39
Recommended load cases • 6-5 Structural code, AISC • 12-39
Static output plot • 10-18 Structural files, Include • 5-36
Static output processor Structural steel checks - AISC • 12-39
132 column reports • 7-2 Structural Steel Checks - AISC • 12-39
Animation of static solution • 7-2 Structural steel example • 10-11, 10-18, 10-31
Commands in static output • 7-2 Structural Steel Example #1 • 10-11
Initiating the static output processor • 7-2 Structural Steel Example #2 • 10-18
Plotting statics • 7-2 Structural Steel Example #3 • 10-31
Report options • 7-2 Structural steel input • 10-2
Report titles • 7-2
View-reports • 7-2
Static Output Processor • 7-1
Static output review • 3-13
Plotting static output • 3-13
Static Output Review • 3-13
Static results • 8-3
12 Index
AISC database, structural steel input • 10-2 Time history profile definitions • 8-33
Connecting pipe to structure • 10-18 Time History Profile Definitions • 8-33
Connectin • 10-18 Time history results • 9-2
Time vs. force • 8-33
Displaced • 10-18
Title • 5-31
Editing structural steel input • 10-2 Tools menu • 4-8
End connections,structural steel input • 10-2 Tools Menu • 4-8
Format of structural steel input • 10-2 Training • 1-6
Include in piping job • 10-2 Trunnion • 12-6, 12-8
Include a struct • 10-2 Tutorial
Kaux-include str • 10-2 Center of gravity report, tutorial • 3-9
Plotting, tutorial • 3-5
Index numbers, structural steel input • 10-2
Sample model input, tutorial • 3-5
Initiate structural steel input
Struct • 10-2 U
Initiating structural steel input • 10-2 UBC • 8-20
Help • 10-2 Underground pipe modeler • 11-2, 11-3
Keywords in structural steel input • 10-2 Underground pipe/buried pipe
Running structural steel input • 10-2 Bilinear supports • 11-9
Static output plot • 10-18 Bilinear sprin • 11-9
Range command • 10-18 Soil supports • 11-9
Structural Steel Modeler • 10-1 Ultimate load • 11-9
Structure dimensions • 10-18
Structure nodes • 10-18 Yield displace • 11-9
Sturm sequence check • 8-37 Yield stiffnes • 11-9
Sustained load cases • 6-22 Convert input command • 11-3
Sustained stresses • 8-2, 8-15 Element length • 11-3
Sustained sustained load cases • 3-11
Buried pipe displ • 11-3
System and hardware requirements • 2-3
System and Hardware Requirements • 2-3 Lateral bearing l • 11-3
System requirements • 2-3 Meshing
System response • 8-7, 9-5 Lateral bearing meshes • 11-3
T Overburden Compaction Multiplier • 11-9
Soil model numbers • 11-9
Technical Changes • 1-12 Spreadsheet
Technical reference manual • 1-5
Buried element descr • 11-3
Technical support phone numbers • 1-6
TERM • 2 Underground pipe modeler • 11-2
The CAESAR II Main Menu • 4-2 Buried • 11-3
The Spectrum Wizard • 8-18 Soil pr • 11-2
Thermal load case • 6-22
Thermal strains • 5-6 Soil st • 11-2
Thrust loads • 8-17 Zones • 11-3
Time history • 8-30, 8-33, 8-38 Lateral bearing regions • 11-3
Force-time profiles • 8-33 Uniform loads • 5-16
Vibration • 8-33 Uniform Loads • 5-16
Time History • 8-33, 8-38 Unsupported axial length • 12-42
Time history analysis • 8-2 Unsupported length (in-plane bending) • 12-42
Time history load case • 9-2 Unsupported length (out-of-plane bending) • 12-
Time history load cases • 8-14, 8-34 42
Time History Load Cases • 8-34 Updates and license types • 1-9
Index 13
Updates and License Types • 1-9 What is Contained In A Specific Build? • 1-7
Usage factor • 9-5 Wind data
User assistance ASCE #7 wind loads • 6-9
Technical support phone numbers • 1-6 Methods of wind loading • 6-9
Training • 1-6 Pressure vs. elevation table • 6-9
User Control of Produced Results Data • 6-20 Shape factor • 6-9
User Defined Time History Waveform • 8-26 Velocity vs. elevation table • 6-9
User-Controlled Combination Methods • 6-21 Wind/wave • 5-17
Using the CAESAR II Flange Modeler • 12-25 Wind/Wave • 5-17
Using the Underground Pipe Modeler • 11-3 Windows server installation • 2-15
Windows Server Installation • 2-15
V WRC 107 (vessel stresses) • 12-10
Valve • 5-31 WRC 107 stress summations • 12-15
Velocity vs. elevation table • 6-9 WRC 107 Stress Summations • 12-15
Vertical in-line pumps • 12-59 WRC 107 Vessel Stresses • 12-10
Vertical In-Line Pumps • 12-59 WRC 297
Vessel attachment stresses/WRC 107 Nozzle flexibility • 12-17
Input data, WRC 107 • 12-10 Nozzle screen • 12-17
Nozzle data, WRC 107 • 12-10 WRC axes orientation • 12-10
Nozzle loads, WRC 107 • 12-10 WRC Bulletin 297 • 12-17
Curv • 12-10 Y
Inte • 12-10
Yield displacement • 11-9
Reinforcing pad • 12-10 Yield stiffness • 11-9
Stress summations, WRC 107 • 12-15 Young's modulus • 12-39, 12-42
Vessel data • 12-10
Vibration • 8-2, 8-33 Z
View Menu • 4-11 Zone definitions • 11-3
View Output • 5-26
W
Warning Message • 6-4
Warnings • 7-19
Water hammer • 8-29
Specifying the load
Force sets, slug flow • 8-32
Force-time profile • 8-32
Load cases, slug flow • 8-32
Relief load synthesizer • 8-32
Relief valve • 8-32
Slug problems • 8-32
Water hammer analysis • 8-2
Water hammer/slug flow (spectrum) • 8-32
Water Hammer/Slug Flow (Spectrum) • 8-32
Welding Research Council Bulletin 297 • 12-17
What are the Applications of CAESAR II? • 1-3
What Distinguishes CAESAR II From Other Pipe
Stress Packages? • 1-4
What is CAESAR II? • 1-2
COADE Inc.
12777 Jones Road Suite 480

Houston, Texas 77070
Phone: (281)890-4566
Fax: (281)890-3301
Email: sales@coade.com
Web: www.coade.com
CAESAR II
Technical Reference
Version 5.10
Last Revised 111/2007

Caesar Ii

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Caesar Ii

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

September 2007

Dear CAESAR II User,

• Added flange rating evaluation per B16.5 and NC-3658.

• Revised Wind and Seismic load calculations to ASCE #7 2005.

• Added many graphics improvements.

CAESAR II Development Staff

• Added flange rating evaluation per B16.5 and NC-3658.

• Static Output Processor Improvements:

o Reduced report generation times by 70% or better

• Static Load Case Editor enhancements

o Added In-Line Flange Evaluation at the load case level.

• Revised Wind and Seismic load calculations to ASCE #7 2005.

• Added a number of European materials to the material database.

• Updated stainless steel pipe specification data per B36.19M.

• Added Chinese structural steel and expansion joint databases.

• Added spring hanger data from Gradior Power, (Czech Republic).

• Updated the Inoflex Spring Hanger data.

o The code now enforces corrosion allowance, if specified.

• Updated ASCE #7 wind load generation to 2005 Edition:

o Updated Table 6-1 for Importance Factor

Copyright © 1985-2008 COADE, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Printed on 18 September, 2007

ACCEPTANCE OF TERMS OF AGREEMENT BY THE USER

HOOPS‘ License Grant

Chapter 1 Introduction 1-1

Chapter 2 Installation 2-1

Notes on Network ESLs ......................................................................................................................... 2-16

Chapter 3 Quick Start and Basic Operation 3-1

Chapter 4 Main Menu 4-1

Chapter 5 Piping Input 5-1

Chapter 6 Error Checking Static Load Cases 6-1

Chapter 7 Static Output Processor 7-1

Chapter 8 Dynamic Input and Analysis 8-1

DLF/Spectrum Generator - The Spectrum Wizard ................................................................................. 8-18

Control Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 8-35

Chapter 9 Dynamic Output Processing 9-1

Chapter 10 Structural Steel Modeler 10-1

Chapter 11 Buried Pipe Modeling 11-1

Chapter 12 Equipment Component and Compliance 12-1

API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) ............................................................................................................... 12-54

What is CAESAR II?

What are the Applications of CAESAR II?

What Distinguishes CAESAR II From Other Pipe Stress

About the CAESAR II Documentation

Program Support/User Assistance

COADE Technical Support:

Phone: 281-890-4566 E-mail: techsupport@coade.com

Fax: 281-890-3301 Web: www.coade.com

Software Revision Procedures

Can Builds Be Applied To Any Version?

What is Contained In A Specific Build?

Archiving and Reinstalling an Old, Patched Version

Updates and License Types

Static Output Processor Improvements

System and Hardware Requirements

Installing CAESAR II Overview

• Install – Initiates the actual installation procedure.

The CAESAR II License Agreement displays.

Installing CAESAR II in Silent Mode

1. Navigate to the CAESAR II subdirectory on the CD.

Cmd= setup.exe /v"/qb PROPERTY_NAME="value" PROPERTY_NAME2="Value""

The /v switch is to pass msi commands